Instant Funding Archives - Forex Prop Reviews https://forexpropreviews.com/Trading Programs/instant-funding/ We provide reviews, ratings, and the latest news for Proprietary Trading Firms. Wed, 07 May 2025 08:43:28 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.1 https://forexpropreviews.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/cropped-Icon-1-32x32.png Instant Funding Archives - Forex Prop Reviews https://forexpropreviews.com/Trading Programs/instant-funding/ 32 32 FundingPips Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/funding-pips/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=funding-pips https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/funding-pips/#comments Fri, 03 Sep 2021 08:41:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=28116 FundingPips believes that traders undergo three essential stages during their professional development, Student, Practitioner, and Master. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $100,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, […]

The post FundingPips Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

FundingPips believes that traders undergo three essential stages during their professional development, Student, Practitioner, and Master. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $100,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are FundingPips?

FundingPips is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name ANKH PROP – FZCO that was incorporated on the 25th of August, 2022. They are located in Dubai, United Arab Emirates, and are being managed by CEO Khaled Ayesh. FundingPips provide traders with the opportunity to choose between four account types, two two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program, while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

FundingPips headquarters are located at IFZA Business Park, Premises NO. 19448-001, Dubai, United Arab.

Who is the CEO of FundingPips?

Khaled Ayesh is the CEO of FundingPips. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

FundingPips provides its traders with four unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Pro Evaluation
  • Two-step Evaluation
  • One-step Evaluation
  • Zero Program

Two-step Pro Evaluation

FundingPips Two-step Pro Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Pro Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$29
$10,000$55
$25,000$109
$50,000$199
$100,000$359

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum or minimum trading day requirements during phase one.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum or minimum trading day requirements during phase two.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 1% of the initial account balance. You are only required to respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted weekly. Your profit split will be 80%

Two-step Pro Evaluation Scaling Plan

Two-step Pro Evaluation also has a scaling plan. You will receive an account increase as well as daily and maximum drawdown increases based on the number of payouts you successfully qualify for and based on the profit that you secured while funded.

Example:

After 4 successful payouts and a 10% total profit, you will qualify for a 20% increase based on the initial account balance. Maximum drawdown increases to 7%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots.

After 8 successful payouts and a 20% total profit, you will qualify for a 30% increase based on the initial account balance. Daily drawdown increases to 4%, and maximum drawdown increases to 8%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots (total increase 20 lots).

After 12 successful payouts and a 30% total profit, you will qualify for a 40% increase based on the initial account balance. Maximum drawdown increases to 9%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots (total increase 30 lots).

After 16 successful payouts and a 40% total profit, you will qualify for the Hot Seat, which will provide you with an array of unique benefits:

  • Double the initial account balance
  • Personal support and access to advanced trading tools
  • Access to on-demand payouts
  • Increased profit split to 100%
  • Potential access to up to $2,000,000 by successfully scaling your account numerous times
  • Customized trading conditions tailored precisely to your unique trading style
  • Daily drawdown increases to 5%
  • Maximum drawdown increases to 10%
  • The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots.
  • Monthly bonuses (can be seen in the spreadsheet below)
Account SizeMonthly Bonus (Hot Seat Status)
$5,000$100
$10,000$200
$25,000$300
$50,000$400
$100,000$500

Two-step Pro Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 6%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts have a 1% withdrawal requirement.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%. (Scaleable up to 5%)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%. (Scaleable up to 10%)
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • Maximum Risk – The trader has a maximum 3% risk rule on master account, meaning that their floating positions cannot exceed -3% of the account size. If the floating positions drop below the -3% mark, your trading account will be breached.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)

Two-step Evaluation

FundingPips Two-step Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$36
$10,000$66
$25,000$156
$50,000$266
$100,000$444

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 1% of the initial account balance. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested from your funded account after you generate a profit on the first Tuesday, while all the following payouts can also be requested every single Tuesday if all the criteria are met. Your profit split will be 60% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Requesting payouts each Tuesday will resolve in a 60% profit split, bi-weekly payouts resolve in an 80% profit split, and monthly payout cycles will resolve in a 100% profit split.

Two-step Evaluation Scaling Plan

Two-step Evaluation also has a scaling plan. You will receive an account increase as well as daily and maximum drawdown increases based on the number of payouts you successfully qualify for and based on the profit that you secured while funded.

Example:

After 4 successful payouts and a 10% total profit, you will qualify for a 20% increase based on the initial account balance. Maximum drawdown increases to 11%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 20 lots per day.

After 8 successful payouts and a 20% total profit, you will qualify for a 30% increase based on the initial account balance. Daily drawdown increases to 6%, and maximum drawdown increases to 12%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 30 lots per day.

After 12 successful payouts and a 30% total profit, you will qualify for a 40% increase based on the initial account balance. Maximum drawdown increases to 13%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 40 lots per day.

After 16 successful payouts and a 40% total profit, you will qualify for the Hot Seat, which will provide you with an array of unique benefits:

  • Double the initial account balance
  • Personal support and access to advanced trading tools
  • Access to on-demand payouts
  • Increased profit split to 100%
  • Potential access to up to $2,000,000 by successfully scaling your account numerous times
  • Customized trading conditions tailored precisely to your unique trading style
  • Daily drawdown increases to 7%
  • Maximum drawdown increases to 14%
  • The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 50 lots per day.
  • Monthly bonuses (can be seen in the spreadsheet below)
Account SizeMonthly Bonus (Hot Seat Status)
$5,000$100
$10,000$200
$25,000$300
$50,000$400
$100,000$500

Two-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts have a 1% withdrawal requirement.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%. (Scaleable up to 7%)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%. (Scaleable up to 14%)
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • Maximum Risk – The trader has a maximum 3% risk rule on master account, meaning that their floating positions cannot exceed -3% of the account size. If the floating positions drop below the -3% mark, your trading account will be breached.

One-step Evaluation

FundingPips One-step Evaluation provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Evaluation allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$99
$25,000$199
$50,000$299
$100,000$499

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 1% of the initial account balance. You are only required to respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested from your funded account after you generate a profit on the first Tuesday, while all the following payouts can also be requested every single Tuesday if all the criteria are met. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

One-step Evaluation Scaling Plan

One-step Evaluation also has a scaling plan. You will receive an account increase based on the number of payouts you successfully qualify for and based on the profit that you secured while funded.

Example:

After 4 successful payouts and a 10% total profit, you will qualify for a 20% increase based on the initial account balance. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 20 lots per day.

After 8 successful payouts and a 20% total profit, you will qualify for a 30% increase based on the initial account balance. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 30 lots per day.

After 12 successful payouts and a 30% total profit, you will qualify for a 40% increase based on the initial account balance. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 40 lots per day.

After 16 successful payouts and a 40% total profit, you will qualify for the Hot Seat, which will provide you with an array of unique benefits:

  • Double the initial account balance
  • Personal support and access to advanced trading tools
  • Access to on-demand payouts
  • Increased profit split to 100%
  • Potential access to up to $2,000,000 by successfully scaling your account numerous times
  • Customized trading conditions tailored precisely to your unique trading style
  • Daily drawdown increases to 6%
  • Maximum drawdown increases to 10%
  • The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 50 lots per day.
  • Monthly bonuses (can be seen in the spreadsheet below)
Account SizeMonthly Bonus (Hot Seat Status)
$5,000$100
$10,000$200
$25,000$300
$50,000$400
$100,000$500

One-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts have a 1% withdrawal requirement.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%. (Scaleable up to 6%)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%. (Scaleable up to 10%)
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • Daily Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for each individual trading day. Traders are required to respect the 10 daily lot limit rule, meaning that they can open up to 10 lots each trading day. By going over this limit, any open trade will be closed, and you will be restricted from trading until the next day. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • Maximum Risk – The trader has a maximum 3% risk rule on master account, meaning that their floating positions cannot exceed -3% of the account size. If the floating positions drop below the -3% mark, your trading account will be breached.

Zero Program

FundingPips Zero Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Zero Program allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$69
$10,000$99
$25,000$199
$50,000$299
$100,000$499

By purchasing the Zero Program, you are awarded a funded account where the first 3% profit generated on the account cannot be requested as a payout since it acts as a protection. After that, you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 1% of the initial account balance. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout can be after 14 calendar days if you manage to meet the 7 minimum profitable days criteria and you are within the consistency score range, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a bi-weekly basis if all the criteria is met. Your profit split will be 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Zero Program Scaling Plan

The Zero Program also has a scaling plan. You will receive an account increase based on the number of payouts you successfully qualify for and based on the profit that you secured while funded.

Example:

After 4 successful payouts and a 10% total profit, you will qualify for a 20% increase based on the initial account balance. The maximum trailing loss will also be increased by 1%.

After 8 successful payouts and a 20% total profit, you will qualify for a 30% increase based on the initial account balance. The maximum daily loss and maximum trailing loss will both be increased by 1%.

After 12 successful payouts and a 30% total profit, you will qualify for a 40% increase based on the initial account balance. The maximum trailing loss will also be increased by 1%.

After 16 successful payouts and a 40% total profit, you will qualify for the Hot Seat, which will provide you with an array of unique benefits:

  • Access to on-demand payouts
  • Increased profit split to 100%
  • Potential access to up to $2,000,000 by successfully scaling your account numerous times
  • Customized trading conditions tailored precisely to your unique trading style
  • Maximum trailing loss increases by another 1%, totaling 9%
  • Maximum daily loss increases by another 1%, totaling 5%
  • Monthly bonuses (can be seen in the spreadsheet below)
Account SizeMonthly Bonus (Hot Seat Status)
$5,000$100
$10,000$200
$25,000$300
$50,000$400
$100,000$500

Zero Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. Funded accounts have a 1% withdrawal requirement as well as a protection requirement, where the first 3% profit generated in the account cannot be withdrawn.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%. (Scaleable up to 5%)
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 5%. (Scaleable up to 9%)
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. You have a minimum profitable trading day requirement of 7 days. These count if you generate a minimum profit of 0.25% of your initial account balance. It is worth noting that by failing to meet the 7 minimum profitable day requirement within a 30 day period, you trading account will be breached.
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 10-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • Maximum Risk – The trader has a maximum 1% risk rule, meaning that their floating positions cannot exceed -1% of the account size. If the floating positions drop below the -1% mark, your trading account will be breached.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. The profits earned on your best trading day should not exceed 15% of your total profits.

What Makes FundingPips Different From Other Prop Firms? 

FundingPips differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, numerous trading platform options, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices.

FundingPips’ Two-step Pro Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6% in phase one and 6% in phase two, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum or minimum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. The Two-step Pro Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Pro Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices.

Example of comparison between FundingPipsAlpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)5%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsThe5ers
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)5%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FundingPips & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target6%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)5%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary75% up to 90%

FundingPips’ Two-step Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices.

Example of comparison between FundingPipsAlpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 7%)5%
Maximum Loss10% (Scaleable up to 14%)10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsFundedNext (Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 7%)5%
Maximum Loss10% (Scaleable up to 14%)10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 calendar days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 7%)4%
Maximum Loss10% (Scaleable up to 14%)8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80%

FundingPips’ One-step Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in the evaluation phase. The One-step Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices.

Example of comparison between FundingPips & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4% (Scaleable up to 6%)4%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4% (Scaleable up to 6%)4%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary85%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4% (Scaleable up to 6%)3%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary70% up to 95%

FundingPips’ Zero Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is a minimum 1% withdrawal requirement, which can be requested after initially securing a 3% profit on your trading account, with a 3% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss rules. While you don’t have a maximum trading period, you do have a minimum profitable trading day requirement of 7 days, where you must secure a 0.25% profit in each of the 7 days for them to count, which must be secured in a 30 calendar day period. The Zero Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Zero Program stands out mainly for having a high starting profit split of 95%, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable prices.

Example of comparison between FundingPips & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsThe5ers (Hyper Growth)
Profit Target3% Protection Requirement10%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 9%)6%
Minimum Trading Days7 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split95% up to 100% + Monthly Salary50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target3% Protection Requirement10%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)❌
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 9%)6%
Minimum Trading Days7 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split95% up to 100% + Monthly Salary50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FundingPips & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target3% Protection Requirement❌
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)6%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 9%)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days7 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split95% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 100%

In conclusion, FundingPips differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, numerous trading platform options, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices.

Is Getting FundingPips Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Pro Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (6% in phase one and 6% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily, scaleable up to 5% and 6% maximum loss, scaleable up to 10%). It is important to note that there are no maximum or minimum trading day requirements. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100% and a monthly salary.
  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily, scaleable up to 7% and 10% maximum loss, scaleable up to 14%). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 60% up to 100% and a monthly salary.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily, scaleable up to 6%, and 6% maximum loss, scaleable up to 10%). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100% and a monthly salary.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding is realistic primarily due to its initial profit target of 3% for protection coupled with the average maximum loss rule (3% maximum daily loss, scaleable up to 5%, and 5% maximum trailing loss, scaleable up to 9%). It is important to note that there is a minimum profitable trading day requirement of 7 days, where you must secure a 0.25% profit in each of the 7 days for them to count, which must be secured in a 30 calendar day period. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit after the initial 3% requirement, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 95% up to 100% and a monthly salary.

After considering all the factors, FundingPips is highly recommended since you have four unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

FundingPips is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 25th of August, 2022. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

With FundingPips’ Two-Step Pro Evaluation, you become eligible for your first payout after reaching a 1% withdrawal target, provided at least 7 calendar days have passed. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 1% withdrawal target every week with a 80% profit split. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account, depending on the payout cycle you prefer.

While working with FundingPips and reaching funded status with the Two-step Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after reaching a withdrawal target of 1% on the first Tuesday. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 1% withdrawal target every Tuesday with a 60% profit split, bi-weekly with a 80% profit split, or monthly with a 100% profit split. Your profit split will consist of a generous 60% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account, depending on the payout cycle you prefer.

Additionally, while working with FundingPips and reaching funded status with the One-step Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after reaching a withdrawal target of 1% on the first Tuesday. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 1% withdrawal target every Tuesday. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit generated from your funded account.

Lastly, while working with FundingPips and trading on the Zero Program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after generating an initial profit of 3%, which will count as protection. After that, you will have a withdrawal target of 1%, which you will be able to qualify for on a bi-weekly basis if your 7 minimum profitable trading days and consistency criteria are met. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 1% withdrawal target on a bi-weekly basis if all the criteria is met. Your profit split will consist of a generous 95% up to 100% based on the profit generated from your funded account.

When it comes to FundingPips, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for FundingPips is their YouTube and Discord channels, where you can find numerous trader interviews and payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does FundingPips Use?

FundingPips doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. They are partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with FundingPips, they allow you to trade on Match-Trader, cTrader, TradeLocker, or Metatrader 5.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, FundingPips is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the evaluation type and the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/USDEUR/USDGBP/USDNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHF
USD/JPYUSD/HKDUSD/SGDAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPY
AUD/NZDCAD/CHFCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHF
EUR/GBPEUR/JPYEUR/NZDGBP/CHFGBP/JPYAUD/SGD
CAD/JPYEUR/SGDGBP/AUDGBP/CADNZD/CADNZD/CHF
NZD/JPYUSD/CNHAUD/NOKCHF/NOKEUR/NOKEUR/ZAR
GBP/NOKGBP/NZDGBP/SGDGBP/ZARSGD/JPYUSD/MXN
USD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/TRYUSD/ZAR

Commodities

XAU/USDXAG/USDUSOILUKOIL

Indices

SPX500DJI30FTSE100GER40JP225
NDX100STX50

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USDXRP/BTC

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 2 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 2 USD / LOT (0 USD / LOT on Oil)
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Match-Tradertnguqkawzn@investor.accessvdixe1kmpkClick here
cTradertest@fundingpips.comfpspreadtestClick here
TradeLockerClick here
Metatrader 510012234ZmSj2_8_7eClick here

Education

FundingPips doesn’t provide any additional educational content to their community.

However, FundingPips offers traders a meticulously designed trading dashboard, facilitating progress tracking, access to trading objectives, and crucial statistics. This feature also enhances risk management for a more seamless trading experience.

FundingPips Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

FundingPips has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, FundingPips has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.4 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 20,169 reviews. Notably, 81% of these reviews have awarded FundingPips the highest rating of 5 stars.

Having collaborated with FundingPips for the past few months, the client expresses utmost satisfaction, rating everything from spreads and customer support to the owners and payouts as A+. They highly recommend FundingPips for those seeking a prop firm. The client highlights the exceptional level of service, noting that even when faced with an issue, the COO personally reached out to ensure a resolution. FundingPips is commended for going above and beyond, fostering an environment that encourages traders to excel in their craft.

FundingPips is recognized as one of the leading and rapidly growing proprietary trading firms in the industry. Their introduction of innovative features, including on-demand payouts, no time limits, and prompt customer responses, has significantly transformed the landscape of prop firms.

Social Media Statistics

FundingPips can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook14,000 Followers & 12,000 Likes
Instagram203,000 Followers
YouTube21,300 Subscribers
Twitter89,000 Followers
Discord153,683 Members
Linkedin16,277 Followers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@fundingpips.com
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Arabic, Dutch, Hindi, French, Spanish, Urdu

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with FundingPips by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your country, account type, trading platform, and account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, Google Pay, Skrill, Netellet, and a cryptocurrency payment method.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 5% discount on all FundingPips account sizes.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from FundingPips, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, FundingPips is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between four funding programs: Two-step Evaluation and Two-step Pro Evaluation, which is a two-step program, One-step Evaluation, which is a one-step program, and Zero Program, which is an instant funding program.

FundingPips’ Two-step Pro Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits and a monthly salary. Traders must reach profit targets of 6% in phase one and 6% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum or minimum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Pro Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FundingPips’ Two-step Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 60% up to 100% profit splits and a monthly salary. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FundingPips’ One-step Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits and a monthly salary. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FundingPips’ Zero Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Traders have a 3% profit requirement, which will count as protection, with a 3% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have a minimum profitable trading day requirement of 7 days, where you must secure a 0.25% profit in each of the 7 days for them to count, which must be secured in a 30 calendar day period. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Zero Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend FundingPips to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, numerous trading platform options, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdowns, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices. After considering everything FundingPips has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of FundingPips was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 10:50 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on FundingPips and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed FundingPips review by commenting below!

The post FundingPips Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/funding-pips/feed/ 2
FXIFY Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fxify/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=fxify https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fxify/#respond Thu, 02 Sep 2021 19:30:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=44437 FXIFY is a company identifying talented traders based on discipline, focus and consistent risk management within the financial markets. They test them through one of the five available funding programs. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. […]

The post FXIFY Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

FXIFY is a company identifying talented traders based on discipline, focus and consistent risk management within the financial markets. They test them through one of the five available funding programs. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are FXIFY?

FXIFY is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name FXIFY Solutions Limited that was incorporated in May 2023. They are located in London, UK, and are being managed by co-founders David Bhidey and Peter Brown. FXIFY provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, a three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program while being partnered with FXPIG as their broker.

FXIFY’s headquarters are located at Unit 1, 74 Back Church Lane, London, E1 1LX.

Who is the CEO of FXIFY?

David Bhidey and Peter Brown are co-founders of FXIFY.

David Bhidey, a co-founder of FXIFY, has a decade-long career in technology and e-commerce, initially founding an online property company. His passion for technology and finance led him to transition into trading five years ago, joining FXPIG as an Introducing Broker alongside Peter Brown. Together, they navigated the financial markets successfully.

In the past four years, David has honed his proprietary trading skills and, along with Peter, established a leading proprietary trading firm to fill a market gap. Leveraging his background, David aims to make FXIFY a trader-centric success story, prioritizing profitability and integrity. His strategic vision guides the company, ensuring it remains innovative and excellent in the financial markets.

Peter Brown, the second co-founder of FXIFY, brings over a decade of e-commerce and marketing expertise. His digital journey spans agencies, self-establishment, and leadership in performance marketing and website development. Transitioning into personal trading five years ago, Peter partnered with David Bhidey as an Introducing Broker for FXPIG.

Their collaboration led to the creation of FXIFY, addressing an unmet market need. Under Peter’s guidance, FXIFY swiftly rose to prominence as a premier proprietary trading firm. Leading development and performance marketing, Peter leverages his e-commerce and finance background to drive FXIFY’s ongoing success.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

FXIFY provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Two-phase Evaluation
  • One-phase Evaluation
  • Lightning Evaluation
  • Three-phase Evaluation
  • Instant Funding

Two-phase Evaluation

FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-phase Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage (1:50 with add-on).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$89
$15,000$119
$25,000$199
$50,000$379
$100,000$499
$200,000$999
$400,000$1,999

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with no minimum amount and no minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly (bi-weekly by applying an add-on while purchasing your account). Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation

  1. Increased 1:50 Leverage
  2. 90% Profit Split
  3. Bi-weekly Payouts
  4. Performance Protection (Qualifies you for a payout if in profit even if you breach the daily drawdown)

Two-phase Evaluation Scaling Plan

The Two-phase Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Two-phase Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

One-phase Evaluation

FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the one-step evaluation period. The One-phase Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage (1:50 with add-on).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$89
$15,000$119
$25,000$199
$50,000$379
$100,000$499
$200,000$999
$400,000$1,999

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with no minimum amount and no minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly (bi-weekly by applying an add-on while purchasing your account). Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation

  1. Increased 1:50 Leverage
  2. 90% Profit Split
  3. Bi-weekly Payouts
  4. Performance Protection (Qualifies you for a payout if in profit even if you breach the daily drawdown)

One-phase Evaluation Scaling Plan

The One-phase Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

One-phase Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

Lightning Evaluation

FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the one-step evaluation period. The Lightning Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage

Account SizePrice
$10,000$59
$25,000$119
$50,000$209
$100,000$399

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 4% maximum trailing loss rules  and meet the requirement of consistency rule. The consistency rule in with the Instant Funding ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 30% of total profits. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 7 maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you have no minimum trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 4% maximum trailing loss rules and meet the requirement of consistency rule. The consistency rule in with the Instant Funding ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 30% of total profits. Your first payout on your funded account is after 7 days with no minimum amount and 3 minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be % 70 up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation

  1. 90% Profit Split
  2. No Stop Loss

Lightning Evaluation Scaling Plan

The Lightning Evaluation does not has a scaling plan.

Lightning Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Trading Days
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. The consistency rule ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 30% of total profits.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.
  • Stop-Loss Requirement – A stop-loss is compulsory to manage risk and protect your trades. The first and second trades executed without a stop-loss will automatically close (soft breach). The third trade without a stop-loss is considered a hard breach.

Three-phase Evaluation

FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-phase Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage (1:50 with add-on).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$39
$10,000$59
$15,000$79
$25,000$149
$50,000$249
$100,000$399
$200,000$799
$400,000$1,599

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with no minimum amount and no minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly (bi-weekly by applying an add-on while purchasing your account). Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation

  1. Increased 1:50 Leverage
  2. 90% Profit Split
  3. Bi-weekly Payouts
  4. Performance Protection (Qualifies you for a payout if in profit even if you breach the daily drawdown)

Three-phase Evaluation Scaling Plan

The Three-phase Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Three-phase Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1, Phase 2, and Phase 3 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All three evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

Instant Funding

FXIFY’s Instant Funding provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $1,000 up to $50,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$1,000$69
$2,500$119
$5,000$229
$10,000$449
$25,000$899
$50,000$1749

By purchasing Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirement. You must only respect the 8% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements and no minimum trading day requirements. Withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis with an 80% up to 90% profit split.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Instant Funding

  1. 90% Profit Split

Instant Funding Scaling Plan

Instant Funding does not feature a scaling plan.

Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 8%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%. Trailing loss locks as it reaches the initial account balance.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

What Makes FXIFY Different From Other Prop Firms?

FXIFY differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-phase Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FXIFY & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFundedNext (Evaluation)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: 4 Weeks
Phase 2: 8 Weeks
Profit Split80% up to 90%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-phase Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%85%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%75% up to 95%

FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5%, with a 3% maximum daily 4% maximum trailing loss rules and met 30% consistency rule. You also have 7 maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you have 3 minimum trading days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal after 7 days, holding over weekend and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Hola Prime

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYHola Prime
Profit Target5%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Maximum Trading DaysUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 90%65% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFundedNext (One-step Stellar)
Profit Target5%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Maximum Trading DaysUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 90%90% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY &  FunderPro

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFunderPro
Profit Target5%14%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4% (5% Once Funded)
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)7% (10% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Maximum Trading DaysUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 90%80%

FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three, with a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days during each evaluation phase. The Three-phase Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Three-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss5%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%6%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss5%8%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss5%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

FXIFY’s Instant Funding Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is no minimum withdrawal requirement, with a 8% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Keep in mind that Instant Funding doesn’t have a scaling plan. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Instant Funding stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, and bi-weekly withdrawals.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & The5%ers

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYThe5%ers (Hyper Growth)
Profit Target❌10%
Maximum Daily Loss8%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target❌10%
Maximum Daily Loss8%❌
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Tradexprop

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYTradexprop
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss8%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)5% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)80% (90% with Add-on)

In conclusion, FXIFY differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Is Getting FXIFY Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 10% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Lightning Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 5% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are 7 maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 70% up to 90% while meeting the consistency score.
  • Receiving capital from the Three-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding is realistic primarily due to its no initial profit target coupled with above-average maximum loss rule (8% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating profits, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%, up to 90%, if they choose the add-on during the purchase.

After considering all the factors, FXIFY is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, a three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

FXIFY is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in May 2023. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with FXIFY and reaching funded status with the Two-phase Evaluation, One-phase Evaluation, or Three-phase Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout on demand. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 30 calendar days (14 calendar days with add-on). Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with FXIFY and reaching funded status with the Instant Funding, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with FXIFY and reaching funded status with the Lightning Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 7 days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 70% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account while meeting the consistency score..

When it comes to FXIFY payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for FXIFY is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does FXIFY Use?

FXIFY is partnered with FXPIG as their broker.

FXPIG broker is a reliable and transparent platform for traders seeking a robust trading experience. Focusing on providing fair and competitive trading conditions, it offers tight spreads, fast execution, and a wide range of trading instruments. Its dedication to transparency and client satisfaction makes FXPIG a top choice for traders of all experience levels.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with FXIFY, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 4, MetaTrader 5, or DXtrade.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, FXIFY is partnered with FXPIG, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:30 (1:50 with add-on), depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYEUR/MXNEUR/NZDEUR/TRYEUR/USDGBP/AUD
GBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/USDNZD/CAD
NZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/CNH
USD/CZKUSD/DKKUSD/HKDUSD/HUFUSD/ILSUSD/JPY
USD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/TRY
USD/ZAR

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/EURXAU/USDXPD/USDXPT/USD
UKOilUSOilNGAS

Indices

AUS200CHN50UDE30DJ30ES35
F40HKG50JPN225RUS2000STOXX50
UK100US500US500USTECVIX

Stocks

AALAAPLABNBAMZNBABA
COINCSCODISEBAYFB
FGOOGHDINTCJPM
MRNAMSFTNFLXNKEORCL
PTONPYPLQCOMSBUXTSLA
UBERWMTXOM

Cryptocurrencies

ADA/USDBCH/USDBTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USD
SOL/USDXRP/USDBTC/USDTETH/USDT

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX6 USD / LOT (All-in – 0 USD / LOT)
COMMODITIES6 USD / LOT (Only Metals)(All-in – 0 USD / LOT)
INDICES6 USD / LOT (All-in – 0 USD / LOT)
STOCKSRaw & All-in / 0.3% on Stock CFDs
CRYPTO0 USD / LOT (All-in – 0 USD / LOT)

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 4 (All In)FXPIG-Demo621238u6hdvDaClick here
MetaTrader 4 (Raw)FXPIG-DEMO625908f7YdUlyClick here
MetaTrader 5 (All In)FXPIG-Server2100170634M@R7PcKdClick here
MetaTrader 5 (Raw)FXPIG-Server2100139002wxgb2tswClick here
DXtradeClick here

Education

FXIFY doesn’t provide any additional educational content to their community.

Nevertheless, FXIFY provides all its clients with entry to a meticulously crafted trader dashboard, which enhances risk management through continual access to comprehensive statistics and objectives. This guarantees immediate updates, thereby enhancing user satisfaction.

Trustpilot Feedback

FXIFY has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, FXIFY has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 3,014 reviews. Notably, 77% of these reviews have awarded FXIFY the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows the client expressing satisfaction with the excellent proprietary trading experience and prompt payouts. Overall, they found the process to be smooth and commendable. However, they noted a minor delay in activating the funded account, which was attributed to FXIFY’s implementation of online contracts over emails. While this transition caused a slight delay initially, the client acknowledged its potential for expediting future processes. Despite this hiccup, FXIFY secured a position among the client’s top three preferred firms.

The commenter highlighted and described FXIFY’s services as a great experience, praising the company for its excellent rules and policies. They went on to label FXIFY as the most pleasant proprietary trading firm they’ve encountered. The client appreciated feeling supported in maintaining focus on their work as a trader, expressing a sense of peace within the company.

Social Media Statistics

FXIFY can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook56,000 Followers & 15,000 Likes
Twitter28,400 Followers
Discord39,315 members
Instagram68,900 Followers
Telegram6,405 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@fxify.com
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with FXIFY by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, trading platform, price feed type, and add-ons.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all FXIFY account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, PayPal, and cryptocurrency payment methods.

Conclusion

In conclusion, FXIFY is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Two-phase Evaluation, which is a two-step evaluation, the One-phase Evaluation and Lightning Evaluation, which is a one-step evaluation, the Three-phase Evaluation, which is a three-step evaluation, and Instant Funding, which is a direct funding program.

FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-phase Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-phase Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 70% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 50% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Additionally, traders must also meet the 30% consistency rule, ensuring stable and disciplined trading throughout the evaluation process. Regarding time limitations, you have 7 maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-phase Evaluation does not have a scaling plan.

FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Three-phase Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FXIFY’s Instant Funding is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 8% maximum daily loss rule, and 8% maximum trailing loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. It’s essential to note that Instant Funding does not features a scaling plan.

I would recommend FXIFY to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts. After considering everything FXIFY has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of FXIFY was last updated on 09.04.2025 at 12:10 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on FXIFY and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed FXIFY review by commenting below!

The post FXIFY Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fxify/feed/ 0
Hola Prime Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/hola-prime/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=hola-prime https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/hola-prime/#respond Thu, 02 Sep 2021 14:42:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=70746 Hola Prime provides traders with a win-win opportunity where each trader can access substantial capital and lightning-fast payouts, which are distributed within an hour. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $300,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading […]

The post Hola Prime Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Hola Prime provides traders with a win-win opportunity where each trader can access substantial capital and lightning-fast payouts, which are distributed within an hour. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $300,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are Hola Prime?

Hola Prime is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Hola Prime Limited that was incorporated in August 2024. They are located in numerous locations worldwide, including Hong Kong, Dubai, Cyprus, India, and the United Kingdom, and are being managed by CEO Somesh Kapuria. Hola Prime provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and an instant funding program while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

Hola Prime’s headquarters:

  • Hong Kong – L1, Shaw House, 201 Wan Po Road, Tseung Kwan O, Hong Kong
  • Dubai – Dubai Media Center Building 05 VD-G00-273 Dubai, UAE
  • Cyprus – Toni Marouda, 18 Mesa Geitonia, 3120, Limassol, Cyprus
  • India – Plot D-179, 4th Floor, Sector 74, Mohali, Punjab – 160055
  • United Kingdom – Office 206E, Fairbourne Drive, Atterbury, Milton Keynes, Buckinghamshire, MK10 9RG, United Kingdom

Who is the CEO of Hola Prime?

Somesh Kapuria is the CEO of Hola Prime. With decades of leadership experience in the Forex and Securities industry, Somesh has a proven track record of driving sustainable growth and optimizing complex financial operations. His journey includes key leadership roles at Citibank, New York, where he consistently delivered revenue growth and operational efficiency. At Citibank, he was instrumental in the Securities & Funds Management division, leading innovative initiatives in technological and financial products that have become integral tools for asset management firms and brokerages on Wall Street.

With his extensive expertise in financial operations, corporate governance, and strategic management, Somesh is committed to advancing Hola Prime’s mission of transparency and trust. Under his leadership, the company is consistently evolving, offering innovative solutions to meet the demands of the global trading community. Somesh holds an MBA in Finance & Investments from New York, along with a B.Tech in Material Science and an M.Tech in Metallurgy from PEC Chandigarh.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Hola Prime provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Prime Challenge
  • One-step Prime Challenge
  • Two-step Pro Challenge
  • One-step Pro Challenge
  • Direct Account

Two-step Prime Challenge

Hola Prime’s Two-step Prime Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Prime Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$74
$10,000$149
$25,000$249
$50,000$374
$100,000$599
$200,000$1,149
$300,000$1,349

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested, depending on what you choose during checkout: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Additionally, all your future payouts can also be requested on the same payout cycle as the one you chose while purchasing your account: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Your profit split will consist of a 65% profit split if you choose the weekly payout cycle, an 80% profit split if you choose the bi-weekly payout cycle, or a 95% profit split if you choose the monthly payout cycle.

Two-step Prime Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Prime Challenge also has a scaling plan. Suppose a trader is profitable in the last four months with an average return of 10% over the four months and at least two successful withdrawals. In that case, you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

For the second scaling, traders must meet the exact requirements as the first time. As a reward, you will qualify for an Alpha Prime Membership and an account increase of 40%.

For the third scaling and onward, traders must yet again meet the exact requirements to qualify for scaling. As a reward, they will become eligible for a 50% account size increase.

It is worth noting that the scaling is done manually, meaning that you must contact the support team to initiate the scaling process once you become eligible.

Two-step Prime Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.

One-step Prime Challenge

Hola Prime’s One-step Prime Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Prime Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$81
$10,000$161
$25,000$274
$50,000$411
$100,000$649
$200,000$1,299
$300,000$1,499

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of two trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested, depending on what you choose during checkout: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Additionally, all your future payouts can also be requested on the same payout cycle as the one you chose while purchasing your account: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Your profit split will consist of a 65% profit split if you choose the weekly payout cycle, an 80% profit split if you choose the bi-weekly payout cycle, or a 95% profit split if you choose the monthly payout cycle.

One-step Prime Challenge Scaling Plan

The One-step Prime Challenge also has a scaling plan. Suppose a trader is profitable in the last four months with an average return of 10% over the four months and at least two successful withdrawals. In that case, you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

For the second scaling, traders must meet the exact requirements as the first time. As a reward, you will qualify for an Alpha Prime Membership and an account increase of 40%.

For the third scaling and onward, traders must yet again meet the exact requirements to qualify for scaling. As a reward, they will become eligible for a 50% account size increase.

It is worth noting that the scaling is done manually, meaning that you must contact the support team to initiate the scaling process once you become eligible.

One-step Prime Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 2 days.

Two-step Pro Challenge

Hola Prime’s Two-step Pro Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$48
$10,000$89
$25,000$199
$50,000$299
$100,000$499
$200,000$999
$300,000$1,249

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of two trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of two trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested, depending on what you choose during checkout: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Additionally, all your future payouts can also be requested on the same payout cycle as the one you chose while purchasing your account: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Your profit split will consist of a 65% profit split if you choose the weekly payout cycle, an 80% profit split if you choose the bi-weekly payout cycle, or a 95% profit split if you choose the monthly payout cycle.

Two-step Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Pro Challenge also has a scaling plan. Suppose a trader is profitable in the last four months with an average return of 10% over the four months and at least two successful withdrawals. In that case, you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

For the second scaling, traders must meet the exact requirements as the first time. As a reward, you will qualify for an Alpha Prime Membership and an account increase of 40%.

For the third scaling and onward, traders must yet again meet the exact requirements to qualify for scaling. As a reward, they will become eligible for a 50% account size increase.

It is worth noting that the scaling is done manually, meaning that you must contact the support team to initiate the scaling process once you become eligible.

Two-step Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 2 days.

One-step Pro Challenge

Hola Prime’s One-step Pro Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Pro Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:100.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$65
$10,000$120
$25,000$215
$50,000$325
$100,000$549
$200,000$1,098
$300,000$1,349

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of two trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested, depending on what you choose during checkout: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Additionally, all your future payouts can also be requested on the same payout cycle as the one you chose while purchasing your account: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Your profit split will consist of a 65% profit split if you choose the weekly payout cycle, an 80% profit split if you choose the bi-weekly payout cycle, or a 95% profit split if you choose the monthly payout cycle.

One-step Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

The One-step Pro Challenge also has a scaling plan. Suppose a trader is profitable in the last four months with an average return of 10% over the four months and at least two successful withdrawals. In that case, you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

For the second scaling, traders must meet the exact requirements as the first time. As a reward, you will qualify for an Alpha Prime Membership and an account increase of 40%.

For the third scaling and onward, traders must yet again meet the exact requirements to qualify for scaling. As a reward, they will become eligible for a 50% account size increase.

It is worth noting that the scaling is done manually, meaning that you must contact the support team to initiate the scaling process once you become eligible.

One-step Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 2 days.

Direct Account

Hola Prime’s Direct Account program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Direct Account allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$129
$10,000$235
$25,000$575
$50,000$1,149
$100,000$2,249

By purchasing the Direct Account program, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum trailing loss rules. Withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split starts at 80% and can increase to 90% with the add-on option.

Direct Account Scaling Plan

Direct Account also has a scaling plan. Suppose a trader is profitable in the last four months with an average return of 10% over the four months and at least two successful withdrawals. In that case, you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

For the second scaling, traders must meet the exact requirements as the first time. As a reward, you will qualify for an Alpha Prime Membership and an account increase of 40%.

For the third scaling and onward, traders must yet again meet the exact requirements to qualify for scaling. As a reward, they will become eligible for a 50% account size increase.

It is worth noting that the scaling is done manually, meaning that you must contact the support team to initiate the scaling process once you become eligible.

Direct Account Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 5%. Trailing loss locks as it reaches the initial account balance.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 3-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.

What Makes Hola Prime Different From Other Prop Firms?

Hola Prime differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, numerous trading platform options, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Hola Prime’s Two-step Prime Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Prime Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Prime Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & FundingPips

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFundingPips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss8%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss8%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%75% up to 90%

Hola Prime’s One-step Prime Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-step Prime Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Prime Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFundedNext (One-step Stellar)
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days2 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%90% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFTUK
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%50% up to 80%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & FunderPro

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFunderPro
Profit Target10%14%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4% (5% Once Funded)
Maximum Loss6%7% (10% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80%

Hola Prime’s Two-step Pro Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Pro Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & TopTier Trader

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeTopTier Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80% up to 95%

Hola Prime’s One-step Pro Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-step Pro Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimePipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%70% up to 95%

Hola Prime’s Direct Account is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are no withdrawal requirements, only a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day. Direct Account also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Direct Account stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, no evaluation phases, bi-weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 90%.

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss5%6%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & OFP

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeOFP
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss5%3%, 4%, 5%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)26% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target❌10%
Maximum Daily Loss5%❌
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up 80% (90% with Add-on)50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

In conclusion, Hola Prime differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, numerous trading platform options, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Is Getting Hola Prime Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Prime Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 65% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Prime Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 2 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 65% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 2 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 65% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 2 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 65% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Direct Account is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous 80% up to 90% profit split.

After considering all the factors, Hola Prime is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and an instant funding program which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Hola Prime is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in August 2024. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Hola Prime and reaching funded status with the Two-step Pro Challenge, One-step Pro Challenge, Two-step Prime Challenge, or One-step Prime Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout, depending on the payout cycle you choose during checkout, weekly, bi-weekly, monthly. All future payouts will be distributed on the exact same basis, depending on what you choose during checkout: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Your profit split will consist of a 65% profit split if you choose the weekly payout cycle, an 80% profit split if you choose the bi-weekly payout cycle, or a 95% profit split if you choose the monthly payout cycle.

However, while working with Hola Prime’s Direct Account, you will be eligible to receive your payout after only 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to Hola Prime payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Hola Prime is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Hola Prime Use?

Hola Prime is proudly supported by its own brokerage, which offers numerous advantages to traders. This direct backing ensures that they can provide access to tier-1 liquidity, guaranteeing that their clients experience the best possible simulated real-market trading conditions. By leveraging this structure, Hola Prime delivers an enhanced level of transparency, as the company has greater control over execution and pricing, ensuring that traders receive competitive spreads and fast order execution.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with Hola Prime, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 5, cTrader, Match-Trader, or DXtrade.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Hola Prime is proudly supported by its own brokerage, offering a wide range of advantages for traders. This direct backing enables Hola Prime to provide access to tier-1 liquidity, ensuring that clients enjoy optimal simulated real-market trading conditions. Furthermore, this brokerage model empowers Hola Prime to offer an extensive selection of trading instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies. Additionally, with leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the funding program and the trading instrument, traders have the potential to enhance their market exposure.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SEKEUR/SGDEUR/USD
GBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/USD
NZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHF
USD/CNHUSD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD&SGD
USD/ZAR

Commodities

BRENTWTIXAG/USDXAU/USD

Indices

ESTX50FRA40GER40JPN225SPAIN35
UK100NAS100US30SPX500

Cryptocurrencies

BCH/USDBTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX3 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES3 USD / LOT
INDICES3 USD / LOT
CRYPTO3 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
cTradersupport@forexanalysis.comIk9rnH)mq@9NjA9Click here
Match-Tradersupport+hola@forexpropreviews.comb3F#n&9u2Click here
DXtradehola_C14290b3F#n&9u2Click here
MetaTrader 5

Education

Hola Prime provides its community with a detailed Blog, which includes the following categories:

  • Prop Trading
  • Trading Tips
  • Trading Psychology
  • Instruments
  • Trading Updates
  • Traders Q&A
  • Markets Weekly
  • Trading Systems
  • Traders Stories

Additionally, Hola Prime’s Academy offers a tailored and comprehensive educational experience aimed at empowering traders of all levels. Whether you’re just starting or refining advanced strategies, their courses provide actionable insights from expert instructors with years of hands-on experience. The academy’s resources, including video tutorials, webinars, and real-time analysis, are designed to cater to different learning styles, ensuring traders can easily grasp complex concepts. Prime Academy focuses on transparency, breaking down trading strategies into clear, understandable modules for a personalized learning journey.

Hola Prime’s Trading Coaches, on the other hand, provide invaluable support to traders by focusing on the psychological aspects of trading, which are essential for long-term success. They help traders manage emotions, maintain discipline, and make rational decisions, even under pressure. The coaches offer guidance and strategies to improve emotional intelligence, risk management, and stress control, empowering traders to avoid costly mistakes and enhance overall performance. With experts like Christopher Lewis, who brings over 20 years of experience, traders can gain actionable insights that go beyond technical analysis, addressing the mental game of trading.

Hola Prime distinguishes itself as one of the few proprietary trading firms that provides traders with a free trial, allowing them to familiarize themselves with the platform’s trading conditions before committing to an evaluation program. When registering with Hola Prime, you have the option to request a free trial, which grants access to a $10k demo account to test their trading conditions before purchasing a challenge.

Lastly, Hola Prime offers all clients a well-designed trader dashboard that simplifies risk management by providing continuous access to detailed statistics and goals. This ensures real-time updates, enhancing the overall user experience.

Hola Prime

Trustpilot Feedback

Hola Prime has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Hola Prime has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.9 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 1,308 reviews. Notably, 92% of these reviews have awarded Hola Prime the highest rating of 5 stars.

In the first comment, the client shared that he initially had concerns about trading in another country and whether using a VPN with Hola Prime was necessary. However, their doubts were quickly resolved by Max from the customer support team, who provided clear and prompt assistance. The client appreciated the efficient support and expressed gratitude to Hola Prime for an excellent experience.

The client in the second example shared a highly positive experience with Hola Prime, highlighting its impressive profit split model, which offers up to 95%. They were particularly pleased with the swift payout process, noting that they received their share within just 45 minutes. Based on this experience, the client highly recommended Hola Prime to other traders.

Social Media Statistics

Hola Prime can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Instagram7,253 Followers
LinkedIn3,000 Followers
Twitter4,490 Followers
YouTube10,100 Subscribers
Discord3,154 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailcontactus@holaprime.com
PhoneUS: +19294480097
UK: +442045843866
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Hola Prime by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, payout cycle, and trading platform.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all Hola Prime account types and sizes.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, CoinPayments, Confirmo, PayPal, Migpayments, and Columis Payments.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Hola Prime is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Two-step Prime Challenge and Two-step Pro Challenge, which are two-step evaluations, the One-step Prime Challenge and One-step Pro Challenge, which are one-step evaluations, and the Direct Account, which is direct funding program.

Hola Prime’s Two-step Prime Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 65% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 18% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Prime Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Hola Prime’s One-step Prime Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 65% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Prime Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Hola Prime’s Two-step Pro Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 65% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 18% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Pro Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Hola Prime’s One-step Pro Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 65% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Pro Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Hola Prime’s Direct Account is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Traders have no profit requirement, with a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Direct Account features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Hola Prime to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, numerous trading platform options, and an excellent scaling plan feature. After considering everything Hola Prime has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of Hola Prime was last updated on 18.03.2025 at 10:00 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Hola Prime and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Hola Prime review by commenting below!

The post Hola Prime Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/hola-prime/feed/ 0
The5ers Review (10% Discount Link) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-5ers/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-5ers https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-5ers/#comments Wed, 01 Sep 2021 19:10:00 +0000 http://export3.mercury.is/?post_type=casino&p=138 The5ers is both a proprietary trading firm and a growth program that offers distinctive career advancements to forex traders around the globe. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $250,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial […]

The post The5ers Review (10% Discount Link) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

The5ers is both a proprietary trading firm and a growth program that offers distinctive career advancements to forex traders around the globe. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $250,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are The5ers?

The5ers is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Five Percent Online Ltd that was incorporated in January 2016. They are located in Raanana, Israel, as well as in London, UK, and are being managed by CEO Saul Lokier. The5ers provides traders with the opportunity to choose between three account types, a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation, while being partnered with a liquidity provider that grants them direct market access as their broker.

The5ers’ headquarters are located at 14 Haroshet St, Raanana, Israel.

Who is the CEO of The5ers?

Saul Lokier is the CEO of The5ers. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

The5ers provides its traders with three unique funding program options:

  • High Stakes
  • Hyper Growth
  • Bootcamp

High Stakes

The5ers’ High Stakes provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The High Stakes allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$39
$10,000$78
$20,000$165
$60,000$329
$100,000$545

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of $150. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

High Stakes Scaling Plan

High Stakes also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 7%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 11%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 10% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $125,000. Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 10% profit target on your High Stakes account.

High Stakes Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a 3 minimum profitable trading day requirement.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.

Hyper Growth

The5ers’ Hyper Growth provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $20,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Hyper Growth allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$260
$10,000$450
$20,000$850

By purchasing Hyper Growth, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for stage 1. You must also respect the 3% daily pause and 6% maximum loss rule. Your first payout is when you manage to hit your 10% profit target, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 50% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Hyper Growth Scaling Plan

Hyper Growth also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $40,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 7%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 11%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 10% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $80,000. Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 10% profit target on your Hyper Growth account.

Hyper Growth Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for level one is 10%. After the first level, there are no profit target requirements.
  • Daily Pause – The maximum amount a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without triggering the daily pause. When the daily pause is hit, all open trades get closed, and the account remains disabled until the next trading day. All account sizes have a daily pause of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.

Bootcamp

The5ers’ Bootcamp provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $100,000 up to $250,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can manage risk throughout the three-step period. The Bootcamp program allows you to trade with up to 1:10 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$100,000$95 ($205 Once Reaching Funded Status)
$250,000$225 ($350 Once Reaching Funded Status)

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing the 5% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum loss limit rule.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing the 5% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum loss limit rule.

Evaluation phase three requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing the 5% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum loss limit rule.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of $150. You must only respect the 3% daily pause and 4% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 50% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Bootcamp Scaling Plan

The Bootcamp program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 5% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 5%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 2%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 3.5%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 5.5%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 5% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $125,000. Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 5% profit target on your Bootcamp account.

Bootcamp Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for all three evaluation phases is 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Daily Pause – The maximum amount a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without triggering the daily pause. When the daily pause is hit, all open trades get closed, and the account remains disabled until the next trading day. Only funded accounts have a daily pause of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%. (4% Once Funded)
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position.
  • Stop-loss Risk Per Position – Before entering a trade, the trader is required to define a specific percentage-based stop-loss for each position. There is a maximum stop-loss requirement of 2% for each position.

What Makes The5ers Different From Other Prop Firms?

The5ers differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering three unique account types: a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except High Stakes), affordable evaluation fee (Bootcamp), no evaluation phases (Hyper Growth), a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days (High Stakes & Bootcamp), bi-weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

The5ers’ High Stakes is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. High Stakes also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, High Stakes stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between The5ers & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between The5ers & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80%

Example of comparison between The5ers & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary75% up to 90%

The5ers’ Hyper Growth is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is an initial 10% profit target, with a 3% daily pause and a 6% maximum loss limit rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Hyper Growth also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Hyper Growth stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, no evaluation phases, bi-weekly withdrawals after the initial 10% profit target, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between The5ers & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Daily Pause)6%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between The5ers & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Daily Pause)❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between The5ers & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFTUK
Profit Target10%❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Daily Pause)❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%50% up to 80%

The5ers’ Bootcamp is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6% with a 5% maximum loss rule during all three evaluation phases. However, once funded, you have a 3% daily pause and a 4% maximum loss rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. The Bootcamp program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Bootcamp program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, an affordable evaluation fee, a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between The5ers & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%4%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)4%
Maximum Loss5% (4% Once Funded)8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between The5ers & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)5%
Maximum Loss5% (4% Once Funded)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between The5ers & RebelsFunding

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersRebelsFunding
Phase 1 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)5%
Maximum Loss5% (4% Once Funded)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%80% up to 90%

In conclusion, The5ers differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering three unique account types: a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except High Stakes), affordable evaluation fees (Bootcamp), no evaluation phases (Hyper Growth), a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days (High Stakes & Bootcamp), bi-weekly withdrawals, affordable evaluation fee (Bootcamp), and a profit split of up to 100%.

Is Getting The5ers Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the High Stakes program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that you have no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum of 3 profitable trading day requirements in each evaluation phase. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Hyper Growth program is realistic primarily due to its average initial profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% daily pause and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Bootcamp program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (6% in each of the three evaluation phases) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum loss in evaluation phases, and 3% daily pause and 4% maximum loss once funded). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 100%.

After considering all the factors, The5ers is highly recommended since you have three unique funding programs to choose from: a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

The5ers is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in January 2016. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with The5ers and reaching funded status with the High Stakes or Bootcamp programs, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 100% based on the profit that you generated on your funded Bootcamp account, while the High Stakes program will provide you with a generous profit split of 80% up to 100%.

However, while working with The5ers and purchasing the Hyper Growth program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after you manage to hit your 10% profit target. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive your payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 100% based on the profit that you generated on your funded Hyper Growth account.

When it comes to The5ers payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for The5ers is their YouTube channel, where you can find numerous interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of successful Trader Interviews can be seen below.

Which Broker Does The5ers Use?

The5ers doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. They are partnered with a liquidity provider that grants them direct market access as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with The5ers, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 5.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, The5ers is partnered with a liquidity provider that grants them direct market access, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the funding program that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

EUR/USDGBP/USDUSD/JPYUSD/CADAUD/USDNZD/USD
USD/CHFAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZD
NZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPY

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXTI/USDXBR/USD

Indices

NAS100SP500UK100JPN225US30
DAX40

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 4 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 4 USD / LOT (XTI/USD & XBR/USD 0 USD / LOT)
INDICES 4 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5FivePercentOnline-Real2210229gdfsgdsf651Click here

Education

The5ers provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following five categories:

  • Advanced Forex Blog
  • Trader Interviews
  • Trading Room
  • Trading Psychology
  • Trading Strategy

Additionally, we can also find numerous other educational trading resources on their website, such as:

  • Asset Specifications – Updates
  • Trading Tools
  • Autochartist
  • Trading Ideas
  • Psychology Coaching
  • The5ers Classes
  • Videos
  • Forex Pivot Points
  • Trading Course
  • Tips to Succeed in The5ers Funded Trader Program
  • Economic Forex Calendar
  • Webinars & Live Events
  • Forex Scalping Workshop
  • Supply & Demand Workshop

Finally, The5ers provides all clients with access to a carefully designed trader dashboard. This feature improves risk management by offering continuous access to comprehensive statistics and goals, ensuring real-time updates throughout the day. This enhancement significantly contributes to an overall improved user experience.

The5ers Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

The5ers has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, The5ers have a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.9 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 14,269 reviews. Notably, 93% of these reviews have awarded The5ers the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that the client appreciates The5ers as a longstanding company in the field, highlighting the delight in their longevity. They note the smallest spreads and smoother chart movements compared to other prop firms. The support from The5ers is commended as impeccable, with the commenter expressing confidence in reaching out for assistance and guidance and always receiving effective help.

In the second comment, the client praises The5ers for offering an opportunity for Forex traders to manage more substantial capital without risking their own funds. Despite a tight drawdown requirement, the commenter finds their profit-sharing model appealing, emphasizing the evident growth potential. They caution that, like all prop trading opportunities, it’s crucial to thoroughly comprehend the rules and conditions associated with The5ers.

Social Media Statistics

The5ers can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter57,500 Followers
Instagram85,400 Followers
YouTube56,800 Subscribers
TradingView5,700 Followers
Pinterest5,800 Followers
LinkedIn9,320 Followers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailhelp@the5ers.com
Phone+1 (929) 955 5595
+44 (20) 8068 0793
Discord❌
Telegram❌
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Spanish, Arabic

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with The5ers through our affiliate link by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, and payment currency.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from The5ers, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, The5ers is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between three funding programs: the High Stakes, which is a two-step evaluation, the Hyper Growth, which is an instant funding program, and the Bootcamp, which is a three-step evaluation.

The5ers’ High Stakes is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that High Stakes features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The5ers’ Hyper Growth is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 50% up to 100% profit splits from the start. Traders have an initial 10% profit target for stage 1, with a 3% daily pause and 6% maximum loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Hyper Growth features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The5ers’ Bootcamp is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 50% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a 6% profit target in each of the three evaluation phases to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum loss rule to follow. However, once funded, you have a 3% daily pause and a 4% maximum loss rule to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Bootcamp features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend The5ers to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except High Stakes), affordable evaluation fees (Bootcamp), no evaluation phases (Hyper Growth), a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days (High Stakes & Bootcamp), bi-weekly withdrawals, affordable evaluation fee (Bootcamp), and a profit split of up to 100%. After considering everything The5ers has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of The5ers was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 10:45 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on The5ers and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed The5ers review by commenting below!

The post The5ers Review (10% Discount Link) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-5ers/feed/ 16
Funded Trading Plus Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/funded-trading-plus/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=funded-trading-plus https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/funded-trading-plus/#comments Wed, 01 Sep 2021 05:40:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=3245 Funded Trading Plus encourages its traders to succeed in their careers. They enable them to earn more profits by trading up to $200,000 accounts before being eligible to scale their accounts further up to $2,500,000. You can choose from one assessment phase, two two assessment phase challenges, or direct funding. Upon successful completion, you are […]

The post Funded Trading Plus Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Funded Trading Plus encourages its traders to succeed in their careers. They enable them to earn more profits by trading up to $200,000 accounts before being eligible to scale their accounts further up to $2,500,000. You can choose from one assessment phase, two two assessment phase challenges, or direct funding. Upon successful completion, you are rewarded with up to 100% profit splits on your earnings.

Who are Funded Trading Plus?

Funded Trading Plus is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name FTP London Ltd that was incorporated on the 2nd of November, 2021. They are located in London, UK, and are being managed by CEO Simon Massey. Funded Trading Plus provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, a one-step evaluation, three two-step evaluations, and an instant funding program while being partnered with ThinkMarkets as their broker.

Funded Trading Plus’ headquarters are located at 7 Bell Yard, London, WC2A 2JR.

Who is the CEO of Funded Trading Plus?

Simon Massey is the CEO of Funded Trading Plus. He is an adrenaline-driven person who, as a young man, followed the idea that being a first responder in emergency services would give him satisfaction and a long-term career. However, after ten years, he realized that this wasn’t his path as he looked into how his future was forming. He decided to take a leave and used the time to consider his options for the future.

Simon got the idea of going into the financial business from his friend Pasha, who was an ex-city trader for one of the bigger Wall Street banks, who is a successful retail trader. He realized while learning from Pasha that there were numerous possibilities, which encouraged him to start trading for himself. In a couple of years, he decided to quit his job and started trading full-time.

In addition to trading, Simon also focused on helping and mentoring others. With that idea, Trade Room Plus was formed so that he and Michael could share their experience with others and help them start their trading journey. However, the idea of Funded Trading Plus came from the big advantage that Pasha had over average retail traders, which was a serious amount of capital. This way, with the proprietary trading firm formed, they allow every single individual to work with higher amounts of capital that would normally have been unreachable for average retail traders.

Interview With CEO Simon Massey

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Funded Trading Plus provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Experienced Trader Program
  • Prestige Trader Program
  • Advanced Trader Program
  • Premium Trader Program
  • Master Trader Program

Experienced Trader Program

Funded Trading Plus’ Experienced Trader Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $12,500 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Experienced Trader Program allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$12,500$119
$25,000$199
$50,000$349
$100,000$499
$200,000$949

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout can be on day one if you manage to generate a profit, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Experienced Trader Program Scaling Plan

Experienced Trader Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Account SizePhase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Phase 6Phase 7Phase 8
$12,500$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it has reached the required 10% profit target. Raise a support ticket to Funded Trading Plus and request to scale up your trading account. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $210,000 from the previous account balance of $110,000.

Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 10% profit target on your Experienced Trader Program. However, you will be required to reach a total generated profit of 10% in order to become eligible to scale your funded account.

Experience Trader Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.

Prestige Trader Program

Funded Trading Plus’s Prestige Trader Program provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $25,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Prestige Trader Program allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$25,000$199
$50,000$349
$100,000$499

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Prestige Trader Program Scaling Plan

Prestige Trader Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to generate a 20% profit within a minimum period of 2 months, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Account Balance$25,000$50,000$100,000
Phase 1$37,500$75,000$150,000
Phase 2$50,000$100,000$225,000
Phase 3$75,000$150,000$337,500
Phase 4$100,000$225,000$500,000
Phase 5$150,000$337,500$750,000
Phase 6$225,000$500,000$1,150,000
Phase 7$337,500$750,000$1,750,000
Phase 8$500,000$1,150,000$2,500,000
Phase 9$750,000$1,750,000
Phase 10$1,150,000
Phase 11$1,750,000
Phase 12$2,500,000

Example:

The profit requirement for the $100,000 funded account is 20%.

Month 1: Generate a profit of 9%.

Month 2: Generate a profit of 13%.

The total generated profit from the last two months is 22%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it has reached the required 20% profit. Raise a support ticket to Funded Trading Plus and request to scale up your trading account. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $150,000 from the previous account balance of $100,000.

Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 20% profit requirement on your Prestige Trader Program. However, you will be required to reach a total generated profit of 20% in order to become eligible to scale your funded account.

Prestige Trader Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a 3 minimum profitable trading day requirement.

Advanced Trader Program

Funded Trading Plus’s Advanced Trader Program provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $25,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Advanced Trader Program allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$25,000$199
$50,000$349
$100,000$499
$200,000$949

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout can be on day one if you manage to generate a profit, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Advanced Trader Program Scaling Plan

Advanced Trader Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 20% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Account SizePhase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Phase 6Phase 7
$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 20%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 8%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 12%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 20%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it has reached the required 20% profit target. Raise a support ticket to Funded Trading Plus and request to scale up your trading account. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $220,000 from the previous account balance of $120,000.

Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 20% profit target on your Advanced Trader Program. However, you will be required to reach a total generated profit of 20% in order to become eligible to scale your funded account.

Advanced Trader Program Scaling Plan

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 10%.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position.

Premium Trader Program

Funded Trading Plus’s Premium Trader Program provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $25,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Premium Trader Program allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$25,000$247
$50,000$397
$100,000$547
$200,000$1,097

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 8% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Premium Trader Program Scaling Plan

Premium Trader Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Account SizePhase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Phase 6Phase 7
$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it has reached the required 10% profit target. Raise a support ticket to Funded Trading Plus and request to scale up your trading account. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $210,000 from the previous account balance of $110,000.

Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 10% profit target on your Premium Trader Program. However, you will be required to reach a total generated profit of 10% in order to become eligible to scale your funded account.

Premium Trader Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%.

Master Trader Program

Funded Trading Plus’s Master Trader Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Master Trader Program allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$225
$10,000$450
$25,000$1,125
$50,000$2,250
$100,000$4,500

By purchasing the Master Trader Program, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 6% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout can be on day one if you manage to generate a profit, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Master Trader Program Scaling Plan

Master Trader Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Account SizePhase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Phase 6Phase 7Phase 8Phase 9
$5,000$10,000$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$10,000$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000
$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$2,500,000

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it has reached the required 10% profit target. Raise a support ticket to Funded Trading Plus and request to scale up your trading account. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $210,000 from the previous account balance of $110,000.

Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 10% profit target on your Master Trader Program. However, you will be required to reach a total generated profit of 10% in order to become eligible to scale your funded account.

Master Trader Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 6%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.

What Makes Funded Trading Plus Different From Other Prop Firms?

Funded Trading Plus differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: a one-step evaluation, three two-step evaluations, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except Prestige Trader Program), static maximum drawdown (Prestige Trader Program, no evaluation phases (Master Trader Program), a first withdrawal from day one after achieving funded status (except Premium Trader Program), weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Funded Trading Plus’ Experienced Trader Program is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. The Experienced Trader Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Experienced Trader Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a first withdrawal from day one after achieving funded status, weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%85%

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 95%

Funded Trading Plus’ Prestige Trader Program is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. Prestige Trader Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Prestige Trader Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, static maximum drawdown, a first withdrawal after 7 calendar days, weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & The5%ers

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusThe5%ers
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days3 Profitable Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & TopTier Trader

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusTopTier Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

Funded Trading Plus’ Advanced Trader Program is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases. The Advanced Trader Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Advanced Trader Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a first withdrawal from day one after achieving funded status, weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & FTMO

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusFTMO
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

Funded Trading Plus’ Premium Trader Program is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases. The Premium Trader Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Premium Trader Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a first withdrawal after 7 calendar days, weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusFundedNext (Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 95%

Funded Trading Plus’ Master Trader Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are no withdrawal requirements, only a 6% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. The Master Trader Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Master Trader Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, no evaluation phases, a first withdrawal from day one after achieving funded status, weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusThe5ers
Profit Target❌10%
Maximum Daily Loss6%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & OFP

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusOFP
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss6%3%, 4%, or 5%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%26% up to 80%

Example of comparison between Funded Trading Plus & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesFunded Trading PlusFTUK
Profit Target❌❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss6%❌
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%50% up to 80%

In conclusion, Funded Trading Plus differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: a one-step evaluation, three two-step evaluations, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except Prestige Trader Program), static maximum drawdown (Prestige Trader Program, no evaluation phases (Master Trader Program), a first withdrawal from day one after achieving funded status (except Premium Trader Program), weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Is Getting Funded Trading Plus Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Experience Trader Program is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Prestige Trader Program is realistic primarily due to its industry-average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that you have no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum of 3 profitable trading day requirements in each evaluation phase. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Advanced Trader Program is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Premium Trader Program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Master Trader Program is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with average maximum loss rules (6% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous 80% up to 100% profit split.

After considering all the factors, Funded Trading Plus is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from a one-step evaluation, three two-step evaluations, and an instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Funded Trading Plus is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 2nd of November, 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Funded Trading Plus and reaching funded status with the Experienced Trader Program, Advanced Trader Program, or Master Trader Program, you will be eligible to receive your payout on day one if you manage to generate a profit. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 7 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with Funded Trading Plus and reaching funded status with the Premium Trader Program or Prestige Trader Program, you will be eligible to receive your payout after only 7 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 7 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to Funded Trading Plus payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof of Funded Trading Plus is their Discord channel and YouTube channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Funded Trading Plus Use?

Funded Trading Plus is partnered with ThinkMarkets as their broker.

ThinkMarkets is a premium multi-asset online brokerage with headquarters located in London and Melbourne. They provide quick and easy access to a wide range of markets while delivering some of the most recognized trading solutions: MetaTrader 4, MetaTrader 5, and their in-house developed ThinkTrader platform.

As for trading platforms, while working with Funded Trading Plus, they allow you to trade on DXtrade, Match-Trader, or cTrader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Funded Trading Plus is partnered with ThinkMarkets, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:30, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYCAD/CHFCAD/JPYCHF/JPY
EUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPYEUR/USD
GBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/SGDEUR/HUFEUR/NOK
EUR/NZDEUR/PLNEUR/TRYGBP/NZDNZD/CADNZD/CHF
NZD/JPYNZD/USDSGD/JPYUSD/DKKUSD/HKDUSD/HUF
USD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/TRY
USD/ZARUSD/THBUSD/BRLZAR/JPYMXN/JPYNOK/JPY
CNH/JPYEUR/SGDGBP/SGDNZD/SGDEUR/HKDUSD/CNH
AUD/CNH

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXPT/USDXZN/USDXNI/USD
XAU/JPYXAU/EURXAU/AUDXAU/GBPXPD/USD
XAG/EURXAG/JPYUKO/USDUSO/USD

Indices

ASX200EUSTX50FRA40GER30NDX100
UK100US30SPX500JPN225HK50
VIXUS2000USDXSWI20NTH25
CAN60

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USDBCH/USDXRP/USDXLM/USD
ADA/USDBNB/USDDOGE/USDDOT/USDFIL/USDICP/USD
LINK/USDMATIC/USDSOL/USDUNI/USDVET/USDSHIB/USD
XMR/USDEOS/USDAAVE/USDALGO/USDATOM/USDAXS/USD
CAKE/USDEGLD/USDFLOW/USDGRT/USDIOTA/USDMKR/USD
NEO/USDRUNE/USDSTX/USDTHETA/USDXTZ/USDMANA/USD
ARB/USDETC/USDIMX/USDINJ/USDDSH/USDALCX/USD
1INCH/USDALPHA/USDAR/USDAUDIO/USDBADGER/USDBAL/USD
BAND/USDBAT/USDBNT/USDCHR/USDCLV/USDCREAM/USD
CRV/USDDENT/USDDODO/USDENJ/USDFIDA/USDFLM/USD
FTM/USDHBAR/USDICX/USDKNC/USDLINA/USDLRC/USD
MTL/USDNEAR/USDOMG/USDONT/USDPAXG/USDPERP/USD
PROM/USDPUNDIX/USDQTUM/USDRAY/USDREEF/USDREN/USD
SAND/USDSNX/USDSTMX/USDSTORJ/USDSXP/USDWAVES/USD
XEM/USDZIL/USDZRX/USDCHZ/USDCOMP/USDHOT/USD
KSM/USDSUSHI/USDZEC/USDAPT/USDLDO/USDAPE/USD
QNT/USDAGIX/USDGALA/USDRNDR/USDFET/USDBLUR/USD
CFX/USDFXS/USDGNO/USDKLAY/USDLUNC/USDMINA/USD
OSMO/USDPEPE/USDROSE/USDSUI/USDXEC/USDWBTC/USD
GMX/USDBTTC/USDTWT/USDNEXO/USDASTR/USDMASK/USD
CVX/USDTFUEL/USDCELO/USDENS/USDDYDX/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 7 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 0 USD / LOT
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
DXtrade502906FTPNewPW2023!F$Click here
Match-Traderdemo+FTP@fundedtradingplus.comFTPNewPW2023!F$Click here
cTraderdemo@fundedtradingplus.comFTPNewPW2023!F$Click here

Education

Funded Trading Plus provides its community with numerous educational content, such as the following six categories:

  • Relative Drawdown
  • Drawdown Calculator
  • Platform Demonstration
  • Scaling Program
  • Withdrawals
  • Available Markets

Additionally, we can also find a detailed Blog, which includes educational content, such as the following three categories:

  • Learn About Prop Trading
  • Funded Prop Traders
  • Trading Strategies For Prop Trading

Furthermore, Funded Trading Plus also provides its clients with exclusive access to a carefully crafted trader dashboard. This feature improves risk management by ensuring continuous access to comprehensive statistics and goals.

Funded Trading Plus Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

Funded Trading Plus has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Funded Trading Plus has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.7 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 2,406 reviews. Notably, 91% of these reviews have awarded Funded Trading Plus the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows the client praising Funded Trading Plus as one of the best companies they have worked with, appreciating the professionalism and transparency. They specifically acknowledge owner Simon’s consistent support and dedication to facilitating a positive experience.

The commenter highlights Funded Trading Plus as exceptionally different from other prop firms. They praise the timely and polite responses from the customer care team, ensuring effective resolution of all concerns. The simplicity of the firm’s rules and regulations is emphasized, expressing genuine happiness about joining this formidable and unbeatable prop trading platform.

Social Media Statistics

Funded Trading Plus can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter26,200 Followers
Instagram29,600 Followers
TikTok48,600 Followers & 252,200 Likes
Facebook23,000 Followers & 22,000 Likes
YouTube30,100 Subscribers
Discord47,848 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailinfo@fundedtradingplus.com
Phone+44 333 090 9800
DiscordDiscord Link
Telegram❌
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

Choose Your Account – Choose your program type, account size, and trading platform.

Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 10% discount on all Experienced, Prestige, Advanced, and Premium Trader Program account sizes. Please note that the Master Trader Program has no available discounts.

Registration Form – After applying the discount code, fill out the registration form with your personal details.

Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and cryptocurrency payment method after you have successfully applied our discount code and filled out the registration form.

Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from Funded Trading Plus, which will redirect you to the trading dashboard, where you can access your login credentials for the Funded Trading Plus website as well as your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Funded Trading Plus is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Experienced Trader Program, which is a one-step evaluation, the Prestige, Advanced, and Premium Trader Programs, which are two-step evaluations, and the Master Trader Program, which is a direct funding program.

Funded Trading Plus’ Experienced Trader Program is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Experienced Trader Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Funded Trading Plus’ Prestige Trader Program is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that Prestige Trader Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Funded Trading Plus’ Advanced Trader Program is an industry-average two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Advanced Trader Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Funded Trading Plus’ Premium Trader Program is an industry-average two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Premium Trader Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Funded Trading Plus’ Master Trader Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 6% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Master Trader Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Funded Trading Plus to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except Prestige Trader Program), static maximum drawdown (Prestige Trader Program, no evaluation phases (Master Trader Program), a first withdrawal from day one after achieving funded status (except Premium Trader Program), weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%. After considering everything Funded Trading Plus has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of Funded Trading Plus was last updated on 07.03.2025 at 08:58 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Funded Trading Plus and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Funded Trading Plus review by commenting below!

The post Funded Trading Plus Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/funded-trading-plus/feed/ 21
City Traders Imperium Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/city-traders-imperium/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=city-traders-imperium https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/city-traders-imperium/#comments Thu, 10 Jun 2021 16:51:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=1506 City Traders Imperium encourages aspiring traders to achieve financial freedom, no matter their background or where they come from. They bring over four decades of collective experience, providing traders around the globe with unique solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $100,000 and receive […]

The post City Traders Imperium Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

City Traders Imperium encourages aspiring traders to achieve financial freedom, no matter their background or where they come from. They bring over four decades of collective experience, providing traders around the globe with unique solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $100,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are City Traders Imperium?

City Traders Imperium is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name CTI FZCO that was incorporated on the 13th of July, 2018. They are located in Dubai, United Arab Emirates, and are being managed by co-founders Daniel Martin and Martin Najat. City Traders Imperium provides traders with the opportunity to choose between four account types, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and two instant funding programs, while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

City Traders Imperium headquarters are located at Dubai Silicon Oasis, DDP, Building A2, Dubai, United Arab Emirates.

Who is the CEO of City Traders Imperium?

Daniel Martin and Martin Najat are co-founders of City Traders Imperium.

Daniel Martin is one of the co-founders of City Traders Imperium, with more than 20 years of trading experience. He has helped a wide variety of traders to become consistently profitable in their trading by focusing on the development of their trading psychology and methodology. He decided that after years of success and the achievement of financial freedom, he was not done with the markets. Instead of retiring, he committed to a new life goal of creating a global army of profitable traders.

Martin Najat, on the other hand, is the second co-founder of City Traders Imperium. He has seen major success as a Smart Money Concepts trader and has become a full-time trader after improving his trading psychology with the help of Daniel Martin.

His vision while founding City Traders Imperium was to help undercapitalized traders who lacked the amount of capital and help them change their lives. While he was working as an investment analyst in London, he soon realized that he wanted to engage in a lot more than just trading. With that, he is currently running City Traders Imperium and helping build a strong team of profitable traders.

Anyone interested in following Martin Najat can do so by following his Instagram and LinkedIn. This way, you will be able to see more of his posts and what he’s up to on a daily basis.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

City Traders Imperium provides its traders with four unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Challenge
  • One-step Challenge
  • Instant Funding
  • Instant Funding Pro

Two-step Challenge

City Traders Imperium’s Two-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$39
$5,000$59
$10,000$99
$25,000$179
$50,000$329
$100,000$519

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a monthly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Two-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Phase$2,500$5,000$10,000$25,000$50,000$100,000
Phase 1$3,750$7,500$15,000$37,500$75,000$112,500
Phase 2$5,000$10,000$20,000$50,000$100,000$125,000
Phase 3$7,500$15,000$25,000$75,000$112,500$150,000
Phase 4$10,000$20,000$37,500$100,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 5$15,000$25,000$50,000$112,500$150,000$200,000
Phase 6$20,000$37,500$75,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 7$25,000$50,000$100,000$150,000$200,000
Phase 8$37,500$75,000$112,500$175,000
Phase 9$50,000$100,000$125,000$200,000
Phase 10$75,000$112,500$150,000
Phase 11$100,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 12$112,500$150,000$200,000
Phase 13$125,000$175,000
Phase 14$150,000$200,000
Phase 15$175,000
Phase 16$200,000

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

Two-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

One-step Challenge

City Traders Imperium’s One-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$29
$5,000$49
$10,000$79
$25,000$149
$50,000$249
$100,000$449

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum trailing loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum trailing loss rule. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a monthly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The One-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Phase$2,500$5,000$10,000$25,000$50,000$100,000
Phase 1$3,750$7,500$15,000$37,500$75,000$112,500
Phase 2$5,000$10,000$20,000$50,000$100,000$125,000
Phase 3$7,500$15,000$25,000$75,000$112,500$150,000
Phase 4$10,000$20,000$37,500$100,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 5$15,000$25,000$50,000$112,500$150,000$200,000
Phase 6$20,000$37,500$75,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 7$25,000$50,000$100,000$150,000$200,000
Phase 8$37,500$75,000$112,500$175,000
Phase 9$50,000$100,000$125,000$200,000
Phase 10$75,000$112,500$150,000
Phase 11$100,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 12$112,500$150,000$200,000
Phase 13$125,000$175,000
Phase 14$150,000$200,000
Phase 15$175,000
Phase 16$200,000

Example:

The profit target for the $10,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

One-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 5%.
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position.

Instant Funding

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $80,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$69
$5,000$129
$10,000$249
$20,000$449
$40,000$849
$80,000$1,499

By purchasing the Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for phase 1. You must only respect the 6% maximum loss rule. Your first payout is when you manage to hit your 10% profit target, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 50% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Instant Funding Scaling Plan

The Instant Funding also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Phase$2,500$5,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000
Phase 1$5,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000
Phase 2$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000
Phase 3$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000
Phase 4$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000$1,000,000
Phase 5$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 6$160,000$320,000$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 7$320,000$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 8$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 9$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 10$2,000,000

The profit target for the $10,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position.

Instant Funding Pro

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding Pro provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $80,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Instant Funding Pro allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$299
$10,000$599
$20,000$1,199
$40,000$2,399
$80,000$4,799

By purchasing the Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for phase 1. You must only respect the 6% maximum loss rule. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 50% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Instant Funding Pro Scaling Plan

The Instant Funding Pro also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Phase$5,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000
Phase 1$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000
Phase 2$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000
Phase 3$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000
Phase 4$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000$1,000,000
Phase 5$160,000$320,000$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 6$320,000$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 7$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 8$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 9$2,000,000
Phase 10

The profit target for the $10,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position.

What Makes City Traders Imperium Different From Other Prop Firms?

City Traders Imperium differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering four unique account types: a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and two instant funding programs. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, a balance-based drawdown, and access to two unique instant funding programs.

City Traders Imperium’s Two-step Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, and a balance-based drawdown.

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesCTIFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesCTIFundedNext (Evaluation)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: 4 Weeks
Phase 2: 8 Weeks
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesCTIE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80%

City Traders Imperium’s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8%, with a 5% maximum trailing loss rule. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days during the evaluation phase. The One-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, and a balance-based drawdown.

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target8%12%
Maximum Daily Loss❌3%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target8%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌4%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumBlue Guardian
Profit Target8%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌4%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%+ Monthly Salary85%

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is an initial 10% profit target, with a 6% maximum loss rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Instant Funding also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Instant Funding stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, a balance-based drawdown, and access to a unique instant funding program.

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss❌6%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumThe5ers
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumFTUK
Profit Target10%❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss❌❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary50% up to 80%

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding Pro is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are no withdrawal requirements, only a 6% maximum loss rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Instant Funding Pro also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Instant Funding Pro stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, a balance-based drawdown, and access to a unique instant funding program.

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumFXIFY
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss❌8%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% (90% With Add-on)

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumFunding Pips
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss❌3%
Maximum Loss6%5% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary95% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target❌❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss❌4%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary65% up to 95%

In conclusion, City Traders Imperium differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering four unique account types: a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and two instant funding programs. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, a balance-based drawdown, and access to two unique instant funding programs.

Is Getting City Traders Imperium Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 8% coupled with the average maximum loss rule (5% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding is realistic primarily due to its average initial profit target of 10% coupled with the average maximum loss rule (6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding Pro is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with the average maximum loss rule (6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 100%.

After considering all the factors, City Traders Imperium is highly recommended since you have four unique funding programs to choose from, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and two instant funding programs, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

City Traders Imperium is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 13th of July, 2018. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with City Traders Imperium and reaching funded status with the Two-step Challenge and One-step Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first withdrawal on-demand on your funded account. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 30 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with City Traders Imperium and reaching funded status with Instant Funding, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after you manage to hit your 10% profit target. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive your payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your Instant Funding account.

And lastly, while working with City Traders Imperium and reaching funded status with Instant Funding Pro, you will be eligible to receive your first withdrawal on-demand on your funded account. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive your payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your Instant Funding Pro account.

When it comes to City Traders Imperium payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for City Traders Imperium is their Discord channel and YouTube channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does City Traders Imperium Use?

City Traders Imperium doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. They are partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with City Traders Imperium, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 5 and Match-Trader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, City Traders Imperium is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the funding program that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

EUR/USDGBP/USDUSD/JPYUSD/CADAUD/USDNZD/USD
USD/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPYEUR/NZDEUR/AUDEUR/CHF
EUR/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/AUDGBP/NZDGBP/CAD
CAD/CHFCAD/JPYAUD/CADAUD/JPYAUD/CHFAUD/NZD
CHF/JPYNZD/JPYNZD/CADNZD/CHF

Commodities

XAU/USDXAG/USDXTI/USD

Indices

US30USTECUS500UK100DE40
AUS200F40JP225STOXX50CHC50
ES35HKCHKDN25SWI20RUS2000

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDADA/USDETH/USDLTC/USD
SOL/USDXRP/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX5 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES5 USD / LOT
INDICES0.5 USD / LOT
CRYPTO0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5CBT-Limited3220test3220Click here
Match-TraderClick here

Education

City Traders Imperium provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following four categories:

  • Funding
  • Technical Analysis
  • Risk Management
  • Knowledge Base

Additionally, City Traders Imperium also provides traders access to the CTI Academy, which includes numerous educational courses and other educational resources useful for traders of all experience levels.

City Traders Imperium stands out as an exclusive proprietary trading firm that provides a complimentary trial option. This enables traders to familiarize themselves with the platform’s trading conditions, reducing the chance of errors when they eventually choose from the four available funding programs.

Finally, City Traders Imperium provides its clients with exclusive entry to a meticulously crafted trader dashboard. This feature elevates risk management by offering continuous access to comprehensive statistics and objectives.

Trustpilot Feedback

City Traders Imperium has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, City Traders Imperium has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.4 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 1,304 reviews. Notably, 86% of these reviews have awarded City Traders Imperium the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that the client extensively researched various funded prop firms and ultimately chose to sign up with City Traders Imperium. They highlight the excellent services and support received even before signing up. The Instant Funding model is particularly praised as one of the best in the industry and aligns well with their circumstances. With five years of trading experience, they express confidence that City Traders Imperium is a perfect fit for their needs.

The client recently secured funding with City Traders Imperium and praises them as one of the top prop firms in the industry. They highlight the diverse challenges offered by City Traders Imperium, accommodating various trading styles and risk appetites. No issues have been encountered so far, and any concerns are promptly addressed with reasonable and efficient resolution. The commenter strongly recommends City Traders Imperium based on their positive experience.

Social Media Statistics

City Traders Imperium can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

YouTube12,500 Subscribers
Facebook3,900 Followers
Twitter19,200 Followers
Instagram20,300 Followers
TikTok3,495 Followers & 612 Likes
Discord20,170 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@citytradersimperium.com
Phone❌
DiscordDiscord Link
Telegram❌
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with City Traders Imperium by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type and account size.
  • Choose Your Account Size – Choose your account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method & Apply Discount Code – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method and apply our discount code CTI10% and enjoy a 10% discount. Please note that One-step Challenge and No-Evaluation Program have no available discounts.

Conclusion

In conclusion, City Traders Imperium is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between four funding programs: the Two-step Challenge, which is a two-step evaluation, the One-step Challenge, which is a one-step evaluation, and Instant Funding and Instant FUunding Pro, which are instant funding programs.

City Traders Imperium’s Two-step Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

City Traders Imperium’s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 8% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum trailing loss rule to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 50% up to 100% profit splits from the start. Traders have an initial 10% profit target for phase 1, with a 6% maximum loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding Pro is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 6% maximum loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Instant Funding Pro features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend City Traders Imperium to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, a balance-based drawdown, and access to two unique instant funding programs. After considering everything City Traders Imperium offers to traders worldwide, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of City Traders Imperium was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:20 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on City Traders Imperium and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed City Traders Imperium review by commenting below!

The post City Traders Imperium Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/city-traders-imperium/feed/ 23
FTUK Review (10% discount code: forexpropreviews) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/ftuk/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=ftuk https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/ftuk/#comments Tue, 23 Mar 2021 18:00:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=1964 FTUK follows the belief that everyone deserves a chance. That is why they are providing traders all across the globe with an opportunity to become a successful forex trader in an affordable way. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $6.4 Million thanks to their […]

The post FTUK Review (10% discount code: forexpropreviews) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

FTUK follows the belief that everyone deserves a chance. That is why they are providing traders all across the globe with an opportunity to become a successful forex trader in an affordable way. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $6.4 Million thanks to their unique scaling plan. Traders can receive up to 80% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are FTUK?

FTUK is a proprietary trading firm incorporated in February 2021. They began in the UK, hence the name, but have since moved overseas to the United States. they are managed by the Chief Executive Officer, Nicholas Quinn. FTUK provides traders with the opportunity to choose between three account types, a two-step challenge, a one-step challenge, and an instant funding program. They have three industry leading platforms to choose from including TradeLocker, Match Trader and DXTrade, all providing simulated funds in real market conditions.

FTUK’s headquarters are located at:

3017 Boiling Way NE Atlanta, GA 30305, United States.

Video review

Funding Program Options

FTUK provides its traders with three unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Challenge
  • One-step Challenge
  • Instant Funding

Two-step Challenge

FTUK’s Two-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$99
$25,000$179
$50,000$269
$100,000$499

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% static drawdown. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with a minimum withdrawal amount of $250. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be taken after a minimum of 10 trading days from the first trading day on the funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a bi-weekly or weekly basis if you decide to choose the weekly add-on. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FTUK’s Two-step Challenge

  • Weekly Payouts
  • News Trading Allowed
  • Unlock Scaling Level 7

Two-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, they will be able to scale their account to the next available account size. If the trader has any profit share still in the account at the time of scaling it will be transferred to the new account’s balance at the next stage of the scaling plan.

EvaluationLevel 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5Level 6*Level 7*
$10,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000
$25,000$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000
$50,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000
$100,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000$6,400,000
Profit Split80%80%80%80%80%80%80%
Leverage1:301:301:501:501:501:1001:100
*Level 7 is only available as an add-on*

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of $4,000.

Week 2: Generate a profit of $6,000.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

Two-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets. (Besides the 10% target for scaling up the account.)
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days where each of the days requires a minimum profit of 0.5%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Except if you purchase a News Trading Allowed add-on)
  • Risk Per Open Positions – There is a maximum risk of 2% for total open trades.

One-step Challenge

FTUK’s One-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$179
$25,000$229
$50,000$399
$100,000$649

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of four trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with a minimum withdrawal amount of $250. You must respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout can be taken after a minimum of 10 trading days from the first trading day on the funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a bi-weekly or weekly basis if you decide to choose the weekly add-on, regardless of the minimum trading days. Your profit split will be 50% up to 80% based on the which level of the scaling plan you are currently trading.

Add-ons for FTUK’s One-step Challenge

  • Weekly Payouts
  • News Trading Allowed
  • Unlock Scaling Level 7

One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The One-step Challenge also benefits from the scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. If the trader has any profit share still in the account at the time of scaling it will be transferred to the new account’s balance at the next stage of the scaling plan.

EvaluationLevel 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5Level 6*Level 7*
$10,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000
$25,000$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000
$50,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000
$100,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000$6,400,000
Profit Split50%60%60%70%70%80%80%
Leverage1:101:101:201:201:301:301:50
*Level 7 is only available as an add-on*

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of $3,500.

Week 2: Generate a profit of $6,500.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

One-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 4 days.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Except if you purchase a News Trading Allowed add-on)
  • Risk Per Open Positions – There is a maximum risk of 2% for total open trades.

Instant Funding

FTUK’s Instant Funding provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$119
$10,000$199
$25,000$374
$50,000$749
$100,000$1,499

By purchasing the Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account straight away. You must respect the 6% maximum loss rule and also the consistency Score. There is no need for a long payout frequency. You can apply whenever it suits you. Just need the Consistency Score to be met at every payout cycle. Your profit split will be 50% up to 80% based on the scaling level at which you are currently trading.

Add-ons for FTUK’s Instant Funding

  • 20% Additional Profit Boost
  • +2% Increased Drawdown
  • Unlock Scaling Level 7

Instant Funding Scaling Plan

Instant Funding also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size.

Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5Level 6*Level 7*
$5,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000
$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000
$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000
$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000
$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000$6,400,000
10%10%10%10%10%10%10%
50%60%60%60%70%70%80%
1:301:301:301:301:301:301:30
*Level 7 is only available as an add-on*

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of $7,000%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of $3,000%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – There are no profit target requirements. However, there is a 10% scaling target for each level.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Risk Per Open Positions – There is a maximum risk of 2% for total open trades.

What Makes FTUK Different From Other Prop Firms?

FTUK differs from most industry-leading firms due to offering three unique account types: a two-step challenge, a one-step challenge, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as no maximum trading days, no minimum trading days, a scaling plan with a total of 7 levels and payouts on demand with their instant funding model.

FTUK’s Two-step Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% daily drawdown and 10% absolute drawdown. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Challenge also has the unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, bi-weekly payouts, which can become weekly with an add-on, allowed news trading with an add-on, and the scaling plan with a total of 7 levels.

Example of comparison between FTUK & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesFTUKFundedNext (Two-step Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FTUK & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesFTUKAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

Example of comparison between FTUK & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesFTUKSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%75% up to 95%

FTUK’s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily loss and an 8% maximum trailing loss. You also have no time limit during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 calendar days during the evaluation phase. The One-step Challenge also has the unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding program evaluations within the industry, the One-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, bi-weekly payouts, which can become weekly with an add-on, allowed news trading with an add-on, and the scaling plan with a total of 7 levels.

Example of comparison between FTUK & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesFTUKBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%85%

Example of comparison between FTUK & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesFTUKCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%❌
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FTUK & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesFTUKPipFarm (Trailing)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)12% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%70% up to 95%

FTUK’s Instant Funding is a program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from day one. There is only a 6% maximum loss limit rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Instant Funding also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Instant Funding stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, no stop loss requirements, no news trading restrictions, payouts on demand, and the scaling plan with a total of 7 levels.

Example of comparison between FTUK & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesFTUKThe5ers
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)10%
Maximum Daily Loss5%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FTUK & OFP

Trading ObjectivesFTUKOFP
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss5%3%, 4%, or 5%
Maximum Loss6%6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%26% up to 80%

Example of comparison between FTUK & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesFTUKFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss5%6%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%80% up to 100%

In conclusion, FTUK is an industry-leading prop firms that offers three unique account types: a two-step challenge, a one-step challenge, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements with Instant Funding, on-demand payouts, and the scaling plan with a total of 7 levels.

Is Getting FTUK Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). Upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its profit target of 10% coupled with above-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss). Upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 80%.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with an maximum loss rule (6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 80%. Just need the consistency score to be met at every payout cycle.

After considering all the factors, FTUK is highly recommended since you have three unique funding programs to choose from, a two-step challenge, a one-step challenge, and an instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

FTUK is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in February 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with FTUK and reaching funded status with the One-step Challenge or Two-step Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout of a minimum of $250 after 10 trading days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the minimum withdrawal amount of $250 every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you generated on your funded Two-step Challenge, while the One-step Challenge will provide you with a generous profit split of 50% up to 80%.

However, while working with FTUK and purchasing the Instant Funding program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout whenever the consistency score is achieved. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 80% based on the profit that you generated on your account.

When it comes to FTUK payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for FTUK is their Discord channel and YouTube channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does FTUK Use?

FTUK is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated market trading conditions.

As for trading platforms, while working with FTUK, they allow you to trade on Match-Trader, DXtrade, or TradeLocker.

Trading Instruments

FTUK allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

NZD/USDAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/NZDAUD/SGDAUD/USD
CAD/CHFAUD/JPYCAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CAD
EUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/HUFEUR/JPYEUR/NOKEUR/NZD
EUR/PLNEUR/TRYEUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHF
GBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/USDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPY
SGD/JPYUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/DKKUSD/HUFUSD/JPY
USD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/THB
USD/TRYUSD/ZARZAR/JPYMXN/JPYCNH/JPY

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDUKO/USDUSO/USD

Indices

AUS200US30SPX500NDX100FRA40
EUSTX50UK100GER30HK50JPN225
USDXUS2000SWI20NTH25CAN60
VIX

Cryptocurrencies

ETH/USDBTC/USDBCH/USDLTC/USDXRP/USD
ADA/USDBNB/USDDOT/USDLINK/USDUNI/USD
SOL/USDAAVE/USDTHETA/USDCAKE/USDATOM/USD
AVAX/USDXMR/USDLUNA/USDICP/USDFIL/USD
TRX/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 4 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 0 USD / LOT
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTOCURRENCIES 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Match-Tradertest@ftuk.comy46jzcv3m8xaClick here
DXtrade40893402854a4uzagphfh2s3tClick here
TradeLockerFTUKtest@ftuk.comxR=b4Et+mawmClick here

Education

FTUK provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following four categories:

  • General
  • Traders Mindset
  • Technical Strategy
  • Traders Interview

Additionally, FTUK offers its clients a meticulously designed dashboard, which provides traders with seamless risk management aligned with their statistical objectives.

FTUK also have a YouTube channel showing interviews with traders, key insights, and helpful trading tips for their prop firm challenge accounts

Trustpilot Feedback

FTUK has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, FTUK has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 585 reviews. Notably, 72% of these reviews have awarded FTUK the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first client with over a decade of experience describes FTUK as the best proprietary trading firm he has worked with. He highlights the excellence of the support team and emphasizes the ease and speed of withdrawals via both Crypto and Rise. He experienced no issues during the process and strongly recommends FTUK to fellow traders.

The client shared his second review of FTUK after receiving his first payout of $3876, expressing great satisfaction with the funded account conditions, including tight spreads and fast execution. He praised the opportunity provided by the FTUK team, especially thanking Nick. Vishnu also highlighted the outstanding support received from Reza via Discord, commending his patience and thorough explanations, which helped him fully understand the platform’s rules.

Social Media Statistics

FTUK can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter2,300 Followers
Instagram17,400 Followers
Discord6,200 Members
YouTube1,600 Subscribers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@ftuk.com
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with FTUK by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, trading platform, and add-on features.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code forexpropreviews and enjoy a 10% discount on all FTUK account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.

Conclusion

In conclusion, FTUK is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between three funding programs: the Two-step Challenge, which is a two-step evaluation, the One-step Challenge, which is a one-step evaluation, and Instant Funding, which is a direct funding program.

FTUK’s Two-step Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FTUK’s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 50% up to 80% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and an 8% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 trading days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

On the other hand, FTUK’s Instant Funding is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 50% up to 80% profit splits from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements and a 6% maximum loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend FTUK to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements with Instant Funding, and a scaling plan with the total of 7 levels. After considering everything FTUK has to offer to traders all across the globe, they are indeed a an excellent choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of FTUK was last updated on 07.05.2025 at 10:07 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on FTUK and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed FTUK review by commenting below!

The post FTUK Review (10% discount code: forexpropreviews) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/ftuk/feed/ 11
Goat Funded Trader (12% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/goat-funded-trader/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=goat-funded-trader https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/goat-funded-trader/#respond Mon, 01 Mar 2021 06:36:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=25466 Goat Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm that is committed to a trader's success while also offering them an exceptional trading experience.

The post Goat Funded Trader (12% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Goat Funded Trader is dedicated to ensuring the success of traders by providing an outstanding 24/7 trading experience. The commitment includes responsive customer service, refundable fees, achievable profit targets, top-notch trading tools, competitive commissions, and tight spreads. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are Goat Funded Trader?

Goat Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Wishes Tower International SL, which was incorporated on the 17th of May, 2023. They are located in the Canary Islands, Spain, and are being managed by CEO Edoardo Dalla Torre. Goat Funded Trader provides traders with the opportunity to choose between seven account types, three two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluations, a three step evaluations and two instant funding program while being partnered with ThinkMarkets as their broker.

Goat Funded Trader’s headquarters are located in the Canary Islands, Spain.

Who is the CEO of Goat Funded Trader?

Edoardo Dalla Torre is the CEO of Goat Funded Trader. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Goat Funded Trader provides its traders with seven unique funding program options:

  • Goat Challenge
  • Standard Challenge
  • Pro Challenge
  • One-step Challenge
  • Three-step Challenge
  • Standard Instant Funding Program
  • Goat Instant Funding Program

Goat Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $150,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Goat Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$30
$8,000$48
$15,000$88
$25,000$138
$50,000$238
$100,000$398
$150,000$598

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is on-demand or after 30 calendar days after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a monthly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 30 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split

Goat Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Goat Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

Standard Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Standard Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$44
$8,000$84
$15,000$154
$25,000$194
$50,000$294
$100,000$524
$200,000$974

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on demand

Standard Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Standard Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

Pro Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$55
$8,000$89
$15,000$149
$25,000$199
$50,000$299
$100,000$499
$200,000$997

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position and after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on-demand

Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Pro Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 12%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

One-step Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s One-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $15,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the one-step evaluation period. The One-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$15,000$170
$25,000$230
$50,000$339
$100,000$590
$200,000$1,050

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position and after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s One-step Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on-demand

One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

One-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase is set at 10%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

Three-step Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Three-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$65
$15,000$85
$25,000$145
$50,000$225
$100,000$365
$200,000$665

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules and daily profit cap of $3,000. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position and after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Three-step Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on-demand

Three-step Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Three-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for all Phase is set at 6%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.
  • Daily Profit Cap – traders can earn a max of $3,000 per trading day (excess profits are deducted but not considered a violation).

Standard Instant Funding Program

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Instant Funding Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $50,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$98
$5,000$198
$10,000$398
$20,000$798
$50,000$1,898

By purchasing Standard Instant Funding Program, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is on the 5th, 15th, and 25th day of the month, while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 10 days. Your profit split will be 65% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Three-step Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split

Standard Instant Funding Program Scaling Plan

Standard Instant Funding Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size up to three times. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits but will instead receive a 50% profit split based on the 10% generated profit as well as a double-up balance increase. It is worth noting that you can scale your account a maximum of three times, meaning that a $50,000 Instant Funding account can be scaled up to $400,000.

Example:

After generating a profit of 10% on your $50,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $100,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $100,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $200,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $200,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $400,000 account.

Standard Instant Funding Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. There are no profit target requirements. However, there is a 10% scaling target for each level.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%.
  • Stop-loss Risk Per Position – Before entering a trade, the trader is required to define a specific percentage-based stop-loss for each position. There is a maximum risk requirement of 2% for each position.

Goat Instant Funding Program

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Instant Funding Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Goat Instant Funding Program allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$107
$10,000$147
$15,000$217
$25,000$307
$50,000$467
$100,000$767

By purchasing Goat Instant Funding Program, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily, 6% maximum trailing loss rules and have at least 5 trading days before requesting a reward. You also have met the requirement of Consistency Rule. Your first payout is after 14 calendar days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Goat Instant Funding Program Scaling Plan

Goat Instant Funding Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size up to three times. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits but will instead receive a 50% profit split based on the 10% generated profit as well as a double-up balance increase. It is worth noting that you can scale your account a maximum of three times, meaning that a $50,000 Instant Funding account can be scaled up to $400,000.

Example:

After generating a profit of 10% on your $50,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $100,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $100,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $200,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $200,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $400,000 account.

Goat Instant Funding Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. There are no profit target requirements. However, there is a 10% scaling target for each level.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Stop-loss Risk Per Position – Before entering a trade, the trader is required to define a specific percentage-based stop-loss for each position. There is a maximum risk requirement of 2% for each position.
  • Consistency Rule – The consistency rule ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 15% of total profits.

What Makes Goat Funded Trader Different From Other Prop Firms?

Goat Funded Trader differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering seven unique account types: three two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluations, a three-step evaluations, and two instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, a scaling plan , first payout on-demand, profit split up to 100%, and multiple add-on features.

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 6% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during each evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Goat Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, weekend holding, profit split up to 100%, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFundedNext (Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderThe Funded Trader (Rapid)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 8%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during each evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Standard Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, weekend holding, profit split up to 100%, and maximum drawdown, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunded Trading Plus (Advanced)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5% 4%
Maximum Loss10% 8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 4% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during each evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period ,weekend holding, profit split up to 100%, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss8% 10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% 8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5% (Scaleable up to 8%)
Maximum Loss8%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 92.75%

 Goat Funded Trader’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and profit split up to 100%.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% 6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% 6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%85%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFXIFY
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6% 6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

 Goat Funded Trader’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase three, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluations phases. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Three-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and profit split up to 100%.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target6%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%
6%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% 8%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%
4%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% 8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & RebelsFunding

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderRebelsFunding
Phase 1 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%
5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8% 10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Instant Funding Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are no withdrawal requirements, only a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss limit rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Standard Instant Funding Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Standard Instant Funding Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFTUK
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss4%❌
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%50% up to 80%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderThe5ers
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & OFP

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderOFP
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%, 4%, or 5%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%26% up to 80%

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Instant Funding Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are no withdrawal requirements, only a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss limit rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 Trading days. Goat Instant Funding Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Goat Instant Funding Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader &  Hola Prime

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderHola Prime
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss3%5%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)5% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% (90% with Add-on)

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderThe5ers
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss3%6%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%, (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 80%

In conclusion, Goat Funded Trader differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering seven unique account types: three two-step evaluations, one one-step evaluation, one three-step evaluation, and two instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Is Getting Goat Funded Trader Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Goat Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 6% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 Trading days. they offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Standard Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 Trading days. they offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit targets (8% in phase one and 4% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Three-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase three) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 trading days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from Standard Instant Funding Program is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous 65% up to 95% profit split.
  • Receiving capital from Goat Instant Funding Program is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 trading days, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous 80% up to 100% profit split.

After considering all the factors, Goat Funded Trader is highly recommended since you have seven unique funding programs to choose from, three two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, and two instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Goat Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 17th of May, 2023. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Goat Funded Trader and reaching funded status with the Goat Challenge, Standard Challenge, Pro Challenge, One-step Challenge, Three-step Challenge, Standard Instant Funding Program or Goat Instant Funding Program. you will be eligible to receive your first payout on day one if you meet the 3% withdrawal target. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 30 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split with Goat Challenge, Standard Challenge, and Pro Challenge, Goat Instant Funding Program, while with Standard Instant Funding Program, you will be eligible for a 65% profit split.

When it comes to Goat Funded Trader, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Goat Funded Trader is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous trader interviews and payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Goat Funded Trader Use?

Goat Funded Trader is partnered with ThinkMarkets as their broker.

ThinkMarkets is a premium multi-asset online brokerage with headquarters located in London and Melbourne. They provide quick and easy access to a wide range of markets while delivering some of the most recognized trading solutions: MetaTrader 4, MetaTrader 5, and their in-house developed ThinkTrader platform.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with Goat Funded Trader, they allow you to trade on Platform 5, Match-Trader, or TradeLocker.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Goat Funded Trader is partnered with ThinkMarkets, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Challenge that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

EUR/CADCAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZD
AUD/USDCAD/CHFEUR/AUDEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SEK
EUR/SGDGBP/AUDGBP/NZDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPY
NZD/USDUSD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD/SGDEUR/HUFUSD/BRL
USD/CNHUSD/HUFUSD/MXNUSD/TRYUSD/ZAREUR/CZK
EUR/PLNEUR/ZARGBP/ZAREUR/TRY

Commodities

XAU/USDXAU/EURXAG/USDWTIBRENT
NGASCOPPERCPT/USDCORNSOYBEANS
WHEAT

Indices

AUS200ESTX50FRA40GER40UK100
JPN225NAS100SPX500US30CHINA50
HK50SPAIN35USDINDEXVIXUS2000
TAIEX

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USDBCH/USDXRP/USD
XMR/USDDASH/USDZEC/USDDOT/USDLINK/USD
XTZ/USDEOS/USDADA/USDXLM/USDBAT/USD
DOGE/USDSOL/USDMATIC/USDOMG/USDUNI/USD
SHIB/USDSAND/USDALGO/USDATOM/USDAVAX/USD
BNB/USDMANA/USD

As mentioned above, Goat Funded Trader also allows you to trade a wide range of stocks through ThinkMarkets. To view the full list, please refer to the Spread Account below, which will enable you to log into the trading platform and view the complete list of available stocks.

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 7 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 5 USD / LOT
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
STOCKS 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Platform 5Click here
Match-TraderClick here
TradeLockerClick here

Education

Goat Funded Trader provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following seven categories:

  • Trading Tips
  • General
  • Education
  • VIP Goat Traders
  • Affiliate
  • Contest
  • Interview

Additionally, Goat Funded Trader provides its community with a Lot Size Calculator, which was designed to speed up the process of calculating your lot sizes and managing your risk efficiently.

And lastly, Goat Funded Trader also offers a well-designed trading dashboard accessible to all its traders, simplifying the management of risk through the display of trading objectives and associated statistics.

Trustpilot Feedback

Goat Funded Trader has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Goat Funded Trader has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 2,917 reviews. Notably, 68% of these reviews have awarded Goat Funded Trader the highest rating of 5 stars.

The client has been trading with Goat Funded Trader since its launch, having won a giveaway. They report a positive experience, highlighting the platform’s seamless and automated nature. Praise is given to the smooth and prompt payout process. The client expresses a commitment to Goat Funded Trader as one of their top choices for trading with larger capital in the future, indicating a high level of satisfaction and trust in the prop firm.

The client praises Goat Funded Trader, labeling it as one of the best options available. They highlight several positive aspects, including low commission, tight spreads, on-demand payouts, reliable customer support, and a low challenge price. The overall sentiment is that Goat Funded Trader provides comprehensive coverage for traders, indicating a positive and favorable experience with the platform.

Social Media Statistics

Goat Funded Trader can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter60,000 Followers
YouTube5,790 Subscribers
Instagram36,200 Followers
Discord2,487 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@goatfundedtrader.com
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Spanish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Goat Funded Trader by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your swap preference, account type, trading platform, account size, and add-on features.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 12% discount on all Goat Funded Trader account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, CentroBill, and cryptocurrency payment methods.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Goat Funded Trader is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between seven funding programs: the Goat, Standard, and Pro Challenge, which are a two-step evaluation, One-step Challenge, which are a one-step, Three-step Challenge, which are a three-step, Standard Instant Program Funding and Goat Instant Program Funding, which are a direct funding program.

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 6% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 6% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 Trading days in each evaluation phase.

On the other hand, Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Instant Funding is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 65% up to 95% profit splits from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Standard Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

On the other hand, Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Instant Funding is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 80% up to 100% profit splits from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 Trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that Goat Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Goat Funded Trader to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features. After considering everything Goat Funded Trader has to offer to traders all across the globe, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of Goat Funded Trader was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:30 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Goat Funded Trader and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Goat Funded Trader review by commenting below!

The post Goat Funded Trader (12% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/goat-funded-trader/feed/ 0
RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=rebelsfunding https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/#respond Mon, 06 Jul 2020 14:00:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=39635 RebelsFunding prioritizes assisting traders in becoming profitable without the need for high initial capital and fears of losses while also having access to excellent technical solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $320,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished […]

The post RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

RebelsFunding prioritizes assisting traders in becoming profitable without the need for high initial capital and fears of losses while also having access to excellent technical solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $320,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are RebelsFunding?

RebelsFunding is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name RIFM, S.R.O., that was incorporated on the 5th of May, 2023. They are located in Bratislava, Slovak Republic, and are being managed by CEO Marek Soska. RebelsFunding provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

RebelsFunding headquarters are located at Landererova 8, Bratislava – Staré Mesto 811 09, Slovak Republic.

Who is the CEO of RebelsFunding?

Marek Soska is the CEO of RebelsFunding. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video review

Funding Program Options

RebelsFunding provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Copper Program
  • Bronze Program
  • Silver Program
  • Gold Program
  • Diamond Program

Copper Program

RebelsFunding Copper Program provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $320,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the four-step evaluation period. The Copper Program allows you to trade with up to 1:200 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$28
$10,000$44
$20,000$77
$40,000$135
$80,000$259
$160,000$499
$320,000$939

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase four.

Evaluation phase four requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase four. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all four evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Copper Program Scaling Plan

The Copper Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 15% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Copper Program for the first time.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Copper Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for each of the four evaluation phases is 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 4 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Bronze Program

RebelsFunding Bronze Program provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $160,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Bronze Program allows you to trade with up to 1:200 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$42
$10,000$64
$20,000$104
$40,000$179
$80,000$344
$160,000$669

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Bronze Program Scaling Plan

The Bronze Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 15% over the three-month period or a 5% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Bronze Program for the first time.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Bronze Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for each of the three evaluation phases is 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 5 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Silver Program

RebelsFunding Silver Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $80,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Silver Program allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:100.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$35
$5,000$50
$10,000$80
$20,000$130
$40,000$230
$80,000$420

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Silver Program Scaling Plan

The Silver Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last four months with an average return of 15% over the four-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Silver Program for the first time.

Example:

After 4 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Silver Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 6 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Gold Program

RebelsFunding Gold Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $40,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Gold Program allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$50
$5,000$70
$10,000$100
$20,000$160
$40,000$280

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Gold Program Scaling Plan

The Gold Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last four months with an average return of 15% over the four-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Gold Program for the first time.

Example:

After 4 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Gold Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 8 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Diamond Program

RebelsFunding Diamond Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $1,000 up to $20,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Diamond Program allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$1,000$50
$2,000$100
$5,000$190
$10,000$360
$20,000$690

By purchasing the Diamond Program, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for phase 1. You must also respect the 6% maximum loss rule while being required to execute a minimum of five trades to qualify for a payout. Your first payout is once you manage to secure a 10% profit, while all other withdrawals can be submitted once you manage to secure a minimum profit of 5% and upon reaching a profit of 10%, which also automatically scales your account. Your profit split will be 75% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Diamond Program Scaling Plan

The Diamon Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $20,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 10% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $32,000.

Diamond Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for phase one is 10%. After the first level, there are no profit target requirements.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 5 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

What Makes RebelsFunding Different From Other Prop Firms?

RebelsFunding differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Program prices.

RebelsFunding’s Copper Program is a four-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete four phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in each of the four evaluation phases, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in each evaluation phase. The Copper Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Copper Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and affordable prices.

RebelsFunding’s Bronze Program is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in each of the three evaluation phases, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in each evaluation phase. The Bronze Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Bronze Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and affordable prices.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe5ers (Bootcamp)
Phase 1 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%6%
Maximum Daily Loss5%❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)
Maximum Loss10%5% (4% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%50% up to 100%

RebelsFunding’s Silver Program is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in each evaluation phase. The Silver Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Silver Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%75% up to 90%

RebelsFunding’s Gold Program is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in each evaluation phase. The Gold Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Gold Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingMyFundedFX
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 92.75%

RebelsFunding’s Diamond Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is an initial 10% profit target, with a 6% maximum loss limit rule. You also have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades during each payout cycle. The Diamond Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Diamond Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, no evaluation phases, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & OFP

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingOFP
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss❌3%, 4%, or 5%
Maximum Loss6%6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%26% up to 80%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe5ers
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFTUK
Profit Target10%❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss❌❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%50% up to 80%

In conclusion, RebelsFunding differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Programs.

Is Getting RebelsFunding Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Copper Program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in all four evaluation phases) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of four trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Bronze Program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in all three evaluation phases) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of five trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Silver Program is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of six trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Gold Program is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of eight trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Diamond Program is realistic primarily due to its average initial profit target of 10% coupled with an average maximum loss rule (6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of five trades. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75%.

After considering all the factors, RebelsFunding is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

RebelsFunding is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 5th of May, 2023. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with RebelsFunding and reaching funded status with the Copper, Bronze, Silver, or Gold Program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Copper or Bronze Program, while the Silver and Gold Program will provide you with a generous profit split of 75% up to 90%.

However, while working with RebelsFunding and reaching funded status with the Diamond Program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after you manage to generate a 10% profit. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive your payouts if you manage to generate a minimum profit of 5% or upon reaching a profit of 10%, which also automatically scales your account. Your profit split will consist of a generous 75% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Diamond Program.

When it comes to RebelsFunding payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for RebelsFunding is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does RebelsFunding Use?

RebelsFunding doesn’t trade with common broker brands. They are partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with RebelsFunding, they allow you to trade on RF-Trader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, RebelsFunding is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:200, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Program that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/CZK
EUR/GBPEUR/HUFEUR/JPYEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/PLN
EUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZD
GBP/USDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/CZKUSD/HUFUSD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOK
USD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/TRYUSD/ZAR

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXPD/USDXPT/USD1NGAS
1USO

Indices

USTECDE30DJ30F40JPN225
STOXX50UK100US500

Stocks

AAPLAMZNBACSCOFB
GOOGHPQIBMNFLXTSLA

Cryptocurrencies

ADA/USDTSOL/USDTBTC/USDTDOGE/USDT
ETH/USDTLTC/USDTNEO/USDT

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
COMMODITIES 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
INDICES 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
CRYPTO 2 USD per $100,000 Capital

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
RF-TraderguestROPreviews1Click here

Education

RebelsFunding provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as:

  • Educational Articles
  • Company Updates
  • Other Articles

RebelsFunding distinguishes itself as a unique proprietary trading company offering a complimentary trial option. This allows traders to acquaint themselves with and adapt to the platform’s trading conditions, minimizing the likelihood of errors when they eventually opt for one of the five available evaluation programs.

Lastly, RebelsFunding grants all clients entry to a trader dashboard meticulously crafted by professionals. This functionality simplifies risk management by providing continual access to comprehensive statistics and objectives, guaranteeing real-time updates.

RebelsFunding Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

RebelsFunding has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On TrustpilotRebelsFunding has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.3 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 1,473 reviews. Notably, 68% of these reviews have awarded RebelsFunding the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows us RebelsFunding being praised as one of the best prop firms, offering one of the best rates and lowest commissions in the industry. The client expresses admiration for the amazing customer support. They highlight the advantage of a 1:200 leverage, emphasizing its potential for earning significant profits. The client also shares their positive experience, currently holding a 10,000 Bronze Program with love for RebelsFunding.

RebelsFunding stands out as one of a few prop firms that provide open access and freedom for everyone to trade in the market. The client appreciates their affordable programs, emphasizing that any individual can participate. They praise the favorable conditions and supportive customer care, suggesting that even in the event of an account setback, it’s worth pursuing another account with RebelsFunding due to the bright future they envision.

Social Media Statistics

RebelsFunding can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook9,400 Followers & 5,800 Likes
Twitter5,864 Followers
Instagram11,300 Followers
YouTube1,730 Subscribers
TikTok617 Followers & 746 Likes
Telegram1,754 Members
Discord15,727 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@rebelsfunding.com
Phone+421 911 611 250
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Czech, Portuguese, Slovak, Swahili, Thai, Vietnamese

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with RebelsFunding by filling out the registration form with your personal details.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type and account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, PayPal, cryptocurrency, and bank wire transfer payment methods.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all RebelsFunding account types.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from RebelsFunding, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, RebelsFunding is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Copper Program, which is a four-step evaluation, the Bronze Program, which is a three-step evaluation, the Silver Program, which is a two-step evaluation, the Gold Program, which is a one-step evaluation, and the Diamond Program, which is an instant funding program.

RebelsFunding’s Copper Program is a four-step evaluation that requires the completion of four phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a 5% profit target in each evaluation phase to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during all four evaluation phases. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Copper Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Bronze Program is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a 5% profit target in each evaluation phase to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Bronze Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Silver Program is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Silver Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Gold Program is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Gold Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Diamond Program is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 75% profit splits from the start. Traders have an initial 10% profit target for phase one, with a 6% maximum loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades within each payout cycle. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Diamond Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend RebelsFunding to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Programs. After considering everything RebelsFunding offers to traders worldwide, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of RebelsFunding was last updated on 07.03.2025 at 09:37 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on RebelsFunding and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed RebelsFunding review by commenting below!

The post RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/feed/ 0
SFX Funded Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/sfx-funded/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=sfx-funded https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/sfx-funded/#respond Tue, 23 Jun 2020 07:25:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=47653 SFX Funded believes in its vision to create a trading space where integrity, transparency, and trader success are the priorities behind its identity. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $120,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various […]

The post SFX Funded Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

SFX Funded believes in its vision to create a trading space where integrity, transparency, and trader success are the priorities behind its identity. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $120,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are SFX Funded?

SFX Funded is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name SFX International FZCO that was incorporated in May 2024. They are located in Dubai, United Arab Emirates, and are being managed by co-founders Husam Samy and Franca Kraut. SFX Funded provides traders with the opportunity to choose between four account types, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions.

SFX Funded’s headquarters are located at 23691–001, A2 Building IFZA Business Park, DDP, DSO, Dubai, UAE.

Who is the CEO of SFX Funded?

Husam Samy is the CEO and co-founder of SFX Funded, who possesses a rich background in civil engineering and aviation, along with over seven years of experience in the financial markets. His sharp analytical skills and strategic mindset, coupled with a deep passion for global markets, position him as an exemplary leader for budding traders. Husam’s unique blend of technical knowledge and market insight drives the firm’s success, fostering an environment of precision and strategic growth.

Franca Kraut, on the other hand, is the COO and co-founder of SFX Funded who brings a substantial entrepreneurial background to the firm. Before venturing into financial markets, she co-founded and successfully exited a thriving real estate business, achieving a seven-figure return. Franca’s strategic vision and leadership prowess have set high standards in both her previous and current ventures, ensuring operational excellence and innovative growth at SFX Funded. Her ability to navigate complex business landscapes makes her an invaluable asset to the firm’s leadership.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

SFX Funded provides its traders with four unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Evaluation
  • Ignite Challenge
  • Rapid Challenge
  • Instant Funding

Two-step Evaluation

SFX Funded’s Two-step Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $7,500 up to $120,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$7,500$79
$15,000$99
$30,000$189
$60,000$289
$120,000$489

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading days and a minimum requirement of 5 active trading days during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 8% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading days and a minimum requirement of 5 active trading days during phase two. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with a minimum withdrawal requirement of 2%. You are only required to respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account can be after 3 minimum trading days (40% profit split) if you managed to achieve a minimum profit of 3% or 21 days (80% profit split) if you managed to achieve a 5 minimum active trading days and a minimum profit of 2%, while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 14 days after your last withdrawal. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for SFX Funded’s Two-step Evaluation

  • 90% Profit Split
  • Reset Option Evaluation Phase
  • Reset Option Funded Phase
  • 5-Day Payouts

Two-step Evaluation Scaling Plan

Two-step Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with a return of at least 10% over the three-month period and a minimum of two processed payouts, then you will become eligible for an account size increase of up to 50%.

Account SizeProfit Target (10%)Profit Split
$7,500$75080%
$11,250$1,12580%
$15,000$1,50080%
$20,000$2,00080%
$30,000$3,00080%
$45,000$4,50080%
$60,000$6,00080%
$90,000$9,00080%
$120,000$12,00080%
$180,000$18,00080%
$250,000$25,00080%
$375,000$37,50085%
$550,000$55,00090%
$825,000$82,50095%
$1,250,000100%

Two-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. There are no profit target requirements, only a 2% minimum withdrawal requirement.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Active Trading Days – Active Trading Days are defined as days when your account generates a profit of 0.5% or more of the starting balance for that day. all three phases (Phase 1, Phase 2, and the Funded Stage) have a default minimum of five active trading days.
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Ignite Challenge

SFX Funded’s Ignite Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Ignite Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$57
$10,000$77
$25,000$147
$50,000$222
$100,000$350

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 7% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 30 calendar days to reach the profit target during phase one. Additionally, you are also required to trade for a minimum of 5 active trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 30 calendar days to reach the profit target during phase two. Additionally, you are also required to trade for a minimum of 5 active trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with a minimum withdrawal requirement of 5%. You are only required to respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account can be 21 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, if you managed to achieve a 5 minimum active trading days. while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 14 days after your last withdrawal, if you managed to achieve a 5 minimum active trading days, with a minimum withdrawal requirement of 5%.

Ignite Challenge Scaling Plan

Ignite Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with a return of at least 10% over the three-month period and a minimum of two processed payouts, then you will become eligible for an account size increase of up to 150%.

Account SizeProfit Target (10%)Profit Split
$5,000$50075%
$10,000$1,00075%
$25,000$2,50075%
$50,000$5,00075%
$100,000$10,00075%
$120,000$12,00080%
$180,000$18,00080%
$250,000$25,00080%
$375,000$37,50085%
$550,000$55,00090%
$825,000$82,50095%
$1,250,000100%

Two-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 7%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 6%. There are no profit target requirements, only a 5% minimum withdrawal requirement.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Active Trading Days – Active Trading Days are defined as days when your account generates a profit of 0.5% or more of the starting balance for that day. all three phases (Phase 1, Phase 2, and the Funded Stage) have a default minimum of five active trading days.
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Rapid Challenge

SFX Funded’s Rapid Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $7,500 up to $120,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Rapid Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$7,500$48
$15,000$60
$30,000$114
$60,000$174
$120,000$294

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 4% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have a single week to reach the profit target during phase one. However, you have no minimum trading day or a minimum number of trade requirements in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with a minimum withdrawal requirement of 2%. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 4% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account can be after 3 minimum trading days (40% profit split) if you managed to achieve a minimum profit of 3% or 5 minimum active trading days (80% profit split) if you managed to achieve a minimum profit of 2%, while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 14 days after your last withdrawal. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for SFX Funded’s Rapid Challenge

  • 90% Profit Split
  • Reset Option Funded Phase
  • 5-Day Payouts

Rapid Challenge Scaling Plan

Rapid Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with a return of at least 10% over the three-month period and a minimum of two processed payouts, then you will become eligible for an account size increase of up to 50%.

Account SizeProfit Target (10%)Profit Split
$7,500$75080%
$11,250$1,12580%
$15,000$1,50080%
$20,000$2,00080%
$30,000$3,00080%
$45,000$4,50080%
$60,000$6,00080%
$90,000$9,00080%
$120,000$12,00080%
$180,000$18,00080%
$250,000$25,00080%
$375,000$37,50085%
$550,000$55,00090%
$825,000$82,50095%
$1,250,000100%

Rapid Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 5%. There are no profit target requirements, only a 2% minimum withdrawal requirement.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 4%.
  • Minimum Active Trading Days – Active Trading Days are defined as days when your account generates a profit of 0.5% or more of the starting balance for that day. There is no minimum active days during the evaluation. However, once funded, you have to complete a minimum of 5 Active Trading Days.
  • Maximum Trading Period – The maximum trading duration during which you must reach your required profit target and conclude your evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a maximum trading period of 7 calendar days.
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Instant Funding

SFX Funded’s Instant Funding provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $1,250 up to $40,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$1,250$65
$2,000$90
$5,000$195
$10,000$395
$20,000$795
$40,000$1,680

By purchasing Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with a minimum withdrawal requirement of 3%. You must only respect the 7% maximum trailing loss rule with the 4% maximum daily loss rule. Your first payout on your funded account can be after 21 days with 10 minimum active trading days (65% profit split), while all the following payouts are on a 14-day basis. Your profit split will be 60% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

if you managed to achieve a minimum profit of 2%, while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 10 days after your last withdrawal once the 5 minimum trading day requirement is met. Your profit split will be 65% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Instant Funding Scaling Plan

Instant Funding also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with a return of at least 10% over the three-month period and a minimum of two processed payouts, they can reach up to 150% of the starting balance, with a maximum scaling of $3.2 million.

Account SizeProfit Target (10%)Profit Split
$1,250$12560%
$2,000$20060%
$5,000$50060%
$10,000$1,00060%
$20,000$2,00060%
$40,000$4,00060%
$80,000$8,00065%
$100,000$10,00065%
$200,000$20,00070%
$400,000$40,00075%
$800,000$80,00080%
$1,600,000$160,00090%
$3,200,000$320,000100%

Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. There are no profit target requirements, only a 3% minimum withdrawal requirement.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 7%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase or qualifying for a payout. The minimum trading day requirement for the first payout is 10 days, while future payouts can be requested every 14 calendar days and require you to trade for a minimum of 10 trading days.
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

What Makes SFX Funded Different From Other Prop Firms?

SFX Funded differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period (except Rapid Challenge), no minimum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases (Two-step Evaluation), a scaleable profit split up to 100%, a unique consistency-based scaling plan, affordable evaluation prices, multiple add-on features (except Instant Funding), and more capital for the same price as most industry-leading prop firms.

SFX Funded’s Two-step Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have 5 minimum active trading days and no maximum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases. The Two-step Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases, a scaleable profit split up to 100%, a unique consistency-based scaling plan, affordable evaluation prices, multiple add-on features, and more capital for the same price as most industry-leading prop firms.

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & TopTier Trader

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedTopTier Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Active Trading Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Active Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedFunded Trading Plus (Premium)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Active Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 100%

SFX Funded’s Ignite Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 7% in phase one and 6% in phase two, with a 3% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have 5 minimum active trading days and maximum 30 calendar day requirements during both evaluation phases. The Ignite Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Ignite Challenge stands out mainly for having a scaleable profit split up to 100%, a unique consistency-based scaling plan, and affordable evaluation prices.

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target7%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%4%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Active Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading Period30 Calendar DaysPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target7%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Active Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading Period30 Calendar DaysPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 100%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & The5%ers

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedThe5%ers
Phase 1 Profit Target7%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Active Trading Days3 Profitable Days
Maximum Trading Period30 Calendar DaysPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 100%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

SFX Funded’s Rapid Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5%, with a 3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss rules. Note that you have a single week to reach the profit target while having no minimum trading day or a minimum number of trade requirements. The Rapid Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Rapid Challenge stands out mainly for having no minimum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase, a scaleable profit split up to 100%, a unique consistency-based scaling plan, affordable evaluation prices, multiple add-on features, and more capital for the same price as most industry-leading prop firms.

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target5%12%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Calendar DaysUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target5%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Calendar DaysUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target5%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Calendar DaysUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%75% up to 95%

SFX Funded’s Instant Funding is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is a minimum 3% withdrawal requirement, with a 7% maximum trailing loss rule. You also have no maximum trading day requirements. However, the first payout is after 3 or 10 minimum active trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 14 days after your last withdrawal once the 10 minimum active trading day requirement is met. Instant Funding also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Instant Funding stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a scaleable profit split up to 150%, a unique consistency-based scaling plan, and affordable evaluation prices.

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & OFP

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedOFP
Profit Target❌ (3% for Withdrawal)❌
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%, 4%, or 5%
Maximum Loss7% (trailing)6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days10 Minimum Active Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split60% up to 100%26% up to 80%

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedThe5ers
Profit Target❌ (2% for Withdrawal)10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss7% (trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days10 Minimum Active Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split60% up to 100%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between SFX Funded & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesSFX FundedFTUK
Profit Target❌ (2% for Withdrawal)❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss4%❌
Maximum Loss7% (trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days10 Minimum Active Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split60% up to 100%50% up to 80%

In conclusion, SFX Funded differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period (except Rapid Challenge), no minimum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases (Two-step Evaluation), a scaleable profit split up to 100%, a unique consistency-based scaling plan, affordable evaluation prices, multiple add-on features (except Instant Funding), and more capital for the same price as most industry-leading prop firms.

Is Getting SFX Funded Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are 5 minimum active trading days and no maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. However, the first payout is after 3 or 21 days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 14 days after your last withdrawal once the 5 minimum active trading day requirement is met. It is worth noting that they also provide larger account sizes for an affordable fee compared to some of the industry leaders. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Ignite Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (7% in phase one and 6% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are 5 minimum active trading days and 30 maximum calendar days requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. However, the first payout is after 21 days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 14 days after your last withdrawal once the 5 minimum active trading day requirement is met. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Rapid Challenge is realistic primarily due to its lower profit target of 5% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that you have a single week to reach the profit target while having no minimum trading day or a minimum number of trade requirements. However, the first payout is after 3 or 21 days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 14 days after your last withdrawal once the 5 minimum active trading day requirement is met. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with average maximum trailing loss rules (7% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. However, the first payout is after 21 days with requirements of at least 10 minimum active trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 14 days after your last withdrawal once the 10 minimum active trading day requirement is met. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 60% up to 100%.

After considering all the factors, SFX Funded is highly recommended since you have four unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

SFX Funded is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in May 2024. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with SFX Funded and reaching funded status with the Two-step Evaluation or Rapid Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 3 minimum trading days (40% profit split) if you managed to achieve a minimum profit of 3% or 10 minimum trading days (80% profit split) if you managed to achieve a minimum profit of 2%. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts every 10 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you generated on your Two-step Evaluation or Rapid Challenge accounts.

However, while working with SFX Funded’s Ignite Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 21 days (80% profit split) if you manage to achieve a minimum profit of 5% and 5 minimum active trading days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts every 14 calendar days once the 5 minimum active trading day requirement is met. Your profit split will consist of a generous 75% up to 100% based on the profit that you generated on your Instant Funding account.

And lastly, while working with SFX Funded’s Instant Funding, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 21 days (60% profit split) if you manage to achieve a minimum profit of 3% and 10 minimum active trading days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts every 14 calendar days once the 10 minimum active trading day requirement is met. Your profit split will consist of a generous 60% up to 100% based on the profit that you generated on your Instant Funding account.

When it comes to SFX Funded payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for SFX Funded is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does SFX Funded Use?

SFX Funded doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. They are partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with SFX Funded, they allow you to trade on Platform 5.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, SFX Funded is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:30, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYEUR/NZDEUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHF
GBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/USDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPY
NZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/JPY

Commodities

WTIXAG/USDXAU/USD

Indices

AUS200EU50FRA40GER30HKIND
ITA40JAP225SPA35UK100US100
US2000US30US500

Cryptocurrencies

ADA/USDBTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USD
SOL/USDXRP/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX4 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES4 USD / LOT
INDICES0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Platform 5Click here

Education

While SFX Funded doesn’t provide any exclusive educational content to their community, you do have the option to sign up for their weekly newsletter, called Currencies and Coffee. This weekly newsletter will include topics such as trading tips, market analysis, and other trading content.

SFX Funded Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

SFX Funded has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, SFX Funded has members of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.6 out of 5 from a total of 187 reviews. Notably, 85% of these reviews have awarded SFX Funded with the highest rating of 5 stars.

This commenter had a positive experience with SFX Funded, praising their strong ethical standards. When he encountered an issue with his account, the SFX Funded team promptly resolved it and apologized for the inconvenience. Despite only using a free account that was won in a giveaway, the client felt well-supported and appreciated the excellent service provided by the SFX Funded team.

The second commenter had a positive experience with SFX Funded, noting the great and quick service received since joining. They are currently awaiting the finalization of their funded account after successfully passing stages 1 and 2. The commenter believes that new firms like SFX Funded are doing better work, as older firms have become too large and indifferent to the needs of traders.

The third client had a positive experience with SFX Funded, celebrating their first payout. They mentioned needing to complete an interview before receiving their payout, which involved easy and fair questions. The client expressed their happiness with the process and stated their intention to stay with SFX Funded for a long time.

Social Media Statistics

SFX Funded can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Instagram2,344 Followers
Twitter2,631 Followers
Discord3,294 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@sfxfunded.com
DiscordDiscord Link
Telegram❌
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with SFX Funded by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type and account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 10% discount on both SFX Funded account types.

Conclusion

In conclusion, SFX Funded is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between four funding programs: Two-step Evaluation and Ignite Challenge, which are two-step program, Rapid Challenge, which is a one-step program, and Instant Funding, which is a direct funding program.

SFX Funded’s Two-step Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. It is also worth noting that when it comes to the Two-step Evaluation, you will receive access to a larger account size at an affordable price compared to most of the leaders within the industry. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance all the way up to $1,250,000.

SFX Funded’s Ignite Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 7% in phase one and 6% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have 5 minimum active trading days and 30 maximum calendar day requirements during both evaluation phases. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Ignite Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance all the way up to $1,250,000.

SFX Funded’s Rapid Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 5% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, note that you have a single week to reach the profit target while having no minimum trading day or a minimum number of trade requirements. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Rapid Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance all the way up to $1,250,000.

SFX Funded’s Instant Funding is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 60% up to 100% profit splits from the start. Traders have an initial 3% minimum withdrawal requirement, with a 7% maximum trailing loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. However, when it comes to minimum trading day requirements, you are to receive your first payout after 21 calendar days and once you manage to hit your 3% minimum withdrawal and 10 minimum trading days requirement. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts every 14 calendar days once the 3 minimum active trading day requirement is met. Finally, it’s essential to note that Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance all the way up to $3,200,000.

I would recommend SFX Funded to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period (except Rapid Challenge), no minimum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases (Two-step Evaluation), a scaleable profit split up to 100%, a unique consistency-based scaling plan, affordable evaluation prices, multiple add-on features (except Instant Funding), and more capital for the same price as most industry-leading prop firms. After considering everything SFX Funded has to offer to traders all across the globe, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of SFX Funded was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:44 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on SFX Funded and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed SFX Funded review by commenting below!

The post SFX Funded Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/sfx-funded/feed/ 0